diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src')
9 files changed, 8572 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_adc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_adc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..562afd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_adc.c @@ -0,0 +1,2433 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_adc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Analog to Digital Convertor (ADC) peripheral: + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + Analog Watchdog configuration + * + Temperature Sensor, Vbat & Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) management + * + Regular Channels Configuration + * + Regular Channels DMA Configuration + * + Injected channels Configuration + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + Dual mode configuration + * + @verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] + (#) select the ADC clock using the function RCC_ADCCLKConfig() + (#) Enable the ADC interface clock using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(); + (#) ADC pins configuration + (++) Enable the clock for the ADC GPIOs using the following function: + RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOx, ENABLE); + (++) Configure these ADC pins in analog mode using GPIO_Init(); + (#) Configure the ADC conversion resolution, data alignment, external + trigger and edge, sequencer lenght and Enable/Disable the continuous mode + using the ADC_Init() function. + (#) Activate the ADC peripheral using ADC_Cmd() function. + + *** ADC channels group configuration *** + ======================================== + [..] + (+) To configure the ADC channels features, use ADC_Init(), ADC_InjectedInit() + and ADC_RegularChannelConfig() functions or/and ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() + (+) To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_ContinuousModeCmd() + function. + (+) To activate the Discontinuous mode, use the ADC_DiscModeCmd() functions. + (+) To activate the overrun mode, use the ADC_OverrunModeCmd() functions. + (+) To activate the calibration mode, use the ADC_StartCalibration() functions. + (+) To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetConversionValue() + function. + + *** DMA for ADC channels features configuration *** + =================================================== + [..] + (+) To enable the DMA mode for ADC channels group, use the ADC_DMACmd() function. + (+) To configure the DMA transfer request, use ADC_DMAConfig() function. + + @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_adc.h" +#include "stm32f30x_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC + * @brief ADC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* CFGR register Mask */ +#define CFGR_CLEAR_Mask ((uint32_t)0xFDFFC007) + +/* JSQR register Mask */ +#define JSQR_CLEAR_Mask ((uint32_t)0x00000000) + +/* ADC ADON mask */ +#define CCR_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFC10E0) + +/* ADC JDRx registers offset */ +#define JDR_Offset ((uint8_t)0x80) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + This section provides functions allowing to: + (#) Initialize and configure the ADC injected and/or regular channels and dual mode. + (#) Management of the calibration process + (#) ADC Power-on Power-off + (#) Single ended or differential mode + (#) Enabling the queue of context and the auto delay mode + (#) The number of ADC conversions that will be done using the sequencer for regular + channel group + (#) Enable or disable the ADC peripheral + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the ADCx peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2,3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DeInit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + /* Enable ADC1/ADC2 reset state */ + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC12, ENABLE); + /* Release ADC1/ADC2 from reset state */ + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC12, DISABLE); + } + else if((ADCx == ADC3) || (ADCx == ADC4)) + { + /* Enable ADC3/ADC4 reset state */ + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC34, ENABLE); + /* Release ADC3/ADC4 from reset state */ + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC34, DISABLE); + } +} +/** + * @brief Initializes the ADCx peripheral according to the specified parameters + * in the ADC_InitStruct. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_InitStruct: pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the specified ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_Init(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CONVMODE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_RESOLUTION(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Resolution)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_TRIG(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent)); + assert_param(IS_EXTERNALTRIG_EDGE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DATA_ALIGN(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_OVRUNMODE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_OverrunMode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_AUTOINJECMODE(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_AutoInjMode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_LENGTH(ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfRegChannel)); + + /*---------------------------- ADCx CFGR Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx CFGR value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CFGR; + /* Clear SCAN bit */ + tmpreg1 &= CFGR_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure ADCx: scan conversion mode */ + /* Set SCAN bit according to ADC_ScanConvMode value */ + tmpreg1 |= (uint32_t)ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode | + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Resolution| + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent| + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge| + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign| + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_OverrunMode| + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_AutoInjMode; + + /* Write to ADCx CFGR */ + ADCx->CFGR = tmpreg1; + + /*---------------------------- ADCx SQR1 Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx SQR1 value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1; + /* Clear L bits */ + tmpreg1 &= ~(uint32_t)(ADC_SQR1_L); + /* Configure ADCx: regular channel sequence length */ + /* Set L bits according to ADC_NbrOfRegChannel value */ + tmpreg1 |= (uint32_t) (ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfRegChannel - 1); + /* Write to ADCx SQR1 */ + ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1; + +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each ADC_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param ADC_InitStruct : pointer to an ADC_InitTypeDef structure which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_StructInit(ADC_InitTypeDef* ADC_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset ADC init structure parameters values */ + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ContinuousConvMode = DISABLE; + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_Resolution = ADC_Resolution_12b; + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent = ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent_0; + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge = ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_None; + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_DataAlign = ADC_DataAlign_Right; + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_OverrunMode = DISABLE; + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_AutoInjMode = DISABLE; + ADC_InitStruct->ADC_NbrOfRegChannel = 1; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the ADCx peripheral according to the specified parameters + * in the ADC_InitStruct. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_InjectInitStruct: pointer to an ADC_InjecInitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the specified ADC injected channel. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_InjectedInit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef* ADC_InjectedInitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_INJEC_TRIG(ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent)); + assert_param(IS_EXTERNALTRIGINJ_EDGE(ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_LENGTH(ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_NbrOfInjecChannel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence1)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence2)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence3)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence4)); + + /*---------------------------- ADCx JSQR Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Get the ADCx JSQR value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->JSQR; + /* Clear L bits */ + tmpreg1 &= JSQR_CLEAR_Mask; + /* Configure ADCx: Injected channel sequence length, external trigger, + external trigger edge and sequences + */ + tmpreg1 = (uint32_t) ((ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_NbrOfInjecChannel - (uint8_t)1) | + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent | + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge | + (uint32_t)((ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence1) << 8) | + (uint32_t)((ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence2) << 14) | + (uint32_t)((ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence3) << 20) | + (uint32_t)((ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence4) << 26)); + /* Write to ADCx SQR1 */ + ADCx->JSQR = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each ADC_InjectedInitStruct member with its default value. + * @param ADC_InjectedInitStruct : pointer to an ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef structure which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_InjectedStructInit(ADC_InjectedInitTypeDef* ADC_InjectedInitStruct) +{ + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent = ADC_ExternalTrigInjecConvEvent_0; + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge = ADC_ExternalTrigInjecEventEdge_None; + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_NbrOfInjecChannel = 1; + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence1 = ADC_InjectedChannel_1; + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence2 = ADC_InjectedChannel_1; + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence3 = ADC_InjectedChannel_1; + ADC_InjectedInitStruct->ADC_InjecSequence4 = ADC_InjectedChannel_1; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the ADCs peripherals according to the specified parameters + * in the ADC_CommonInitStruct. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_CommonInitStruct: pointer to an ADC_CommonInitTypeDef structure + * that contains the configuration information for All ADCs peripherals. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_CommonInit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, ADC_CommonInitTypeDef* ADC_CommonInitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_MODE(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CLOCKMODE(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Clock)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_MODE(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_DMAMode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_ACCESS_MODE(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_DMAAccessMode)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_TWOSAMPLING_DELAY(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_TwoSamplingDelay)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + /* Get the ADC CCR value */ + tmpreg1 = ADC1_2->CCR; + + /* Clear MULTI, DELAY, DMA and ADCPRE bits */ + tmpreg1 &= CCR_CLEAR_MASK; + } + else + { + /* Get the ADC CCR value */ + tmpreg1 = ADC3_4->CCR; + + /* Clear MULTI, DELAY, DMA and ADCPRE bits */ + tmpreg1 &= CCR_CLEAR_MASK; + } + /*---------------------------- ADC CCR Configuration -----------------*/ + /* Configure ADCx: Multi mode, Delay between two sampling time, ADC clock, DMA mode + and DMA access mode for dual mode */ + /* Set MULTI bits according to ADC_Mode value */ + /* Set CKMODE bits according to ADC_Clock value */ + /* Set MDMA bits according to ADC_DMAAccessMode value */ + /* Set DMACFG bits according to ADC_DMAMode value */ + /* Set DELAY bits according to ADC_TwoSamplingDelay value */ + tmpreg1 |= (uint32_t)(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Mode | + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Clock | + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_DMAAccessMode | + (uint32_t)(ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_DMAMode << 12) | + (uint32_t)((uint32_t)ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_TwoSamplingDelay << 8)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + /* Write to ADC CCR */ + ADC1_2->CCR = tmpreg1; + } + else + { + /* Write to ADC CCR */ + ADC3_4->CCR = tmpreg1; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each ADC_CommonInitStruct member with its default value. + * @param ADC_CommonInitStruct: pointer to an ADC_CommonInitTypeDef structure + * which will be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_CommonStructInit(ADC_CommonInitTypeDef* ADC_CommonInitStruct) +{ + /* Initialize the ADC_Mode member */ + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Mode = ADC_Mode_Independent; + + /* initialize the ADC_Clock member */ + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_Clock = ADC_Clock_AsynClkMode; + + /* Initialize the ADC_DMAAccessMode member */ + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_DMAAccessMode = ADC_DMAAccessMode_Disabled; + + /* Initialize the ADC_DMAMode member */ + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_DMAMode = ADC_DMAMode_OneShot; + + /* Initialize the ADC_TwoSamplingDelay member */ + ADC_CommonInitStruct->ADC_TwoSamplingDelay = 0; + +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC peripheral. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the ADEN bit */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_ADEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC peripheral: Set the ADDIS bit */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_ADDIS; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Starts the selected ADC calibration process. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_StartCalibration(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the ADCAL bit */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_ADCAL; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the ADCx calibration value. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +uint32_t ADC_GetCalibrationValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Return the selected ADC calibration value */ + return (uint32_t)ADCx->CALFACT; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the ADCx calibration register. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SetCalibrationValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_Calibration) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the ADC calibration register value */ + ADCx->CALFACT = ADC_Calibration; +} + +/** + * @brief Select the ADC calibration mode. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_CalibrationMode: the ADC calibration mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_CalibrationMode_Single: to select the calibration for single channel + * @arg ADC_CalibrationMode_Differential: to select the calibration for differential channel + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SelectCalibrationMode(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_CalibrationMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CALIBRATION_MODE(ADC_CalibrationMode)); + /* Set or Reset the ADCALDIF bit */ + ADCx->CR &= (~ADC_CR_ADCALDIF); + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CalibrationMode; + +} + +/** + * @brief Gets the selected ADC calibration status. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval The new state of ADC calibration (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetCalibrationStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + /* Check the status of CAL bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR & ADC_CR_ADCAL) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* CAL bit is set: calibration on going */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAL bit is reset: end of calibration */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the CAL bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief ADC Disable Command. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DisableCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the ADDIS bit */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_ADDIS; +} + + +/** + * @brief Gets the selected ADC disable command Status. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval The new state of ADC ADC disable command (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetDisableCmdStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of ADDIS bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR & ADC_CR_ADDIS) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* ADDIS bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADDIS bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the ADDIS bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC Voltage Regulator. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx Voltage Regulator. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_VoltageRegulatorCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* set the intermediate state before moving the ADC voltage regulator + from enable state to disable state or from disable state to enable state */ + ADCx->CR &= ~(ADC_CR_ADVREGEN); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the ADVREGEN bit 0 */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_ADVREGEN_0; + } + else + { + /* Set the ADVREGEN bit 1 */ + ADCx->CR |=ADC_CR_ADVREGEN_1; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selectes the differential mode for a specific channel + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure for the analog watchdog. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @note : Channel 15, 16 and 17 are fixed to single-ended inputs mode. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SelectDifferentialMode(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DIFFCHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the DIFSEL bit */ + ADCx->DIFSEL |= (uint32_t)(1 << ADC_Channel ); + } + else + { + /* Reset the DIFSEL bit */ + ADCx->DIFSEL &= ~(uint32_t)(1 << ADC_Channel); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the Queue Of Context Mode for injected channels. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the Queue Of Context Mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SelectQueueOfContextMode(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the JQM bit */ + ADCx->CFGR |= (uint32_t)(ADC_CFGR_JQM ); + } + else + { + /* Reset the JQM bit */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~(uint32_t)(ADC_CFGR_JQM); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the ADC Delayed Conversion Mode. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADC Delayed Conversion Mode. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AutoDelayCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the AUTDLY bit */ + ADCx->CFGR |= (uint32_t)(ADC_CFGR_AUTDLY ); + } + else + { + /* Reset the AUTDLY bit */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~(uint32_t)(ADC_CFGR_AUTDLY); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group2 Analog Watchdog configuration functions + * @brief Analog Watchdog configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Analog Watchdog configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the 3 Analog Watchdogs + (AWDG1, AWDG2 and AWDG3) in the ADC. + + [..] A typical configuration Analog Watchdog is done following these steps : + (#) The ADC guarded channel(s) is (are) selected using the functions: + (++) ADC_AnalogWatchdog1SingleChannelConfig(). + (++) ADC_AnalogWatchdog2SingleChannelConfig(). + (++) ADC_AnalogWatchdog3SingleChannelConfig(). + + (#) The Analog watchdog lower and higher threshold are configured using the functions: + (++) ADC_AnalogWatchdog1ThresholdsConfig(). + (++) ADC_AnalogWatchdog2ThresholdsConfig(). + (++) ADC_AnalogWatchdog3ThresholdsConfig(). + + (#) The Analog watchdog is enabled and configured to enable the check, on one + or more channels, using the function: + (++) ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd(). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the analog watchdog on single/all regular + * or injected channels + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_AnalogWatchdog: the ADC analog watchdog configuration. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegEnable: Analog watchdog on a single regular channel + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on a single injected channel + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_SingleRegOrInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on a single regular or injected channel + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegEnable: Analog watchdog on all regular channel + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on all injected channel + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_AllRegAllInjecEnable: Analog watchdog on all regular and injected channels + * @arg ADC_AnalogWatchdog_None: No channel guarded by the analog watchdog + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_AnalogWatchdog) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_ANALOG_WATCHDOG(ADC_AnalogWatchdog)); + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CFGR; + /* Clear AWDEN, AWDENJ and AWDSGL bits */ + tmpreg &= ~(uint32_t)(ADC_CFGR_AWD1SGL|ADC_CFGR_AWD1EN|ADC_CFGR_JAWD1EN); + /* Set the analog watchdog enable mode */ + tmpreg |= ADC_AnalogWatchdog; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog1. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param HighThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog High threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @param LowThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdog1ThresholdsConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t HighThreshold, + uint16_t LowThreshold) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(HighThreshold)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_THRESHOLD(LowThreshold)); + /* Set the ADCx high threshold */ + ADCx->TR1 &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_TR1_HT1; + ADCx->TR1 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)HighThreshold << 16); + + /* Set the ADCx low threshold */ + ADCx->TR1 &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_TR1_LT1; + ADCx->TR1 |= LowThreshold; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog2. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param HighThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog High threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 8bit value. + * @param LowThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 8bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdog2ThresholdsConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t HighThreshold, + uint8_t LowThreshold) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the ADCx high threshold */ + ADCx->TR2 &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_TR2_HT2; + ADCx->TR2 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)HighThreshold << 16); + + /* Set the ADCx low threshold */ + ADCx->TR2 &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_TR2_LT2; + ADCx->TR2 |= LowThreshold; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the high and low thresholds of the analog watchdog3. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param HighThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog High threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 8bit value. + * @param LowThreshold: the ADC analog watchdog Low threshold value. + * This parameter must be a 8bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdog3ThresholdsConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t HighThreshold, + uint8_t LowThreshold) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the ADCx high threshold */ + ADCx->TR3 &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_TR3_HT3; + ADCx->TR3 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)HighThreshold << 16); + + /* Set the ADCx low threshold */ + ADCx->TR3 &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_TR3_LT3; + ADCx->TR3 |= LowThreshold; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the analog watchdog 2 guarded single channel + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure for the analog watchdog. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdog1SingleChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->CFGR; + /* Clear the Analog watchdog channel select bits */ + tmpreg &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_CFGR_AWD1CH; + /* Set the Analog watchdog channel */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)ADC_Channel << 26); + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the analog watchdog 2 guarded single channel + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure for the analog watchdog. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdog2SingleChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->AWD2CR; + /* Clear the Analog watchdog channel select bits */ + tmpreg &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_AWD2CR_AWD2CH; + /* Set the Analog watchdog channel */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)1 << (ADC_Channel); + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->AWD2CR |= tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the analog watchdog 3 guarded single channel + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure for the analog watchdog. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AnalogWatchdog3SingleChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg = ADCx->AWD3CR; + /* Clear the Analog watchdog channel select bits */ + tmpreg &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_AWD3CR_AWD3CH; + /* Set the Analog watchdog channel */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)1 << (ADC_Channel); + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->AWD3CR |= tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group3 Temperature Sensor - Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) and VBAT management functions + * @brief Vbat, Temperature Sensor & Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) management function + * +@verbatim + ==================================================================================================== + ##### Temperature Sensor - Vrefint (Internal Reference Voltage) and VBAT management functions ##### + ==================================================================================================== + + [..] This section provides a function allowing to enable/ disable the internal + connections between the ADC and the Vbat/2, Temperature Sensor and the Vrefint source. + + [..] A typical configuration to get the Temperature sensor and Vrefint channels + voltages is done following these steps : + (#) Enable the internal connection of Vbat/2, Temperature sensor and Vrefint sources + with the ADC channels using: + (++) ADC_TempSensorCmd() + (++) ADC_VrefintCmd() + (++) ADC_VbatCmd() + + (#) select the ADC_Channel_TempSensor and/or ADC_Channel_Vrefint and/or ADC_Channel_Vbat using + (++) ADC_RegularChannelConfig() or + (++) ADC_InjectedInit() functions + + (#) Get the voltage values, using: + (++) ADC_GetConversionValue() or + (++) ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue(). + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the temperature sensor channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the temperature sensor. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_TempSensorCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the temperature sensor channel*/ + ADC1_2->CCR |= ADC12_CCR_TSEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the temperature sensor channel*/ + ADC1_2->CCR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC12_CCR_TSEN; + } + } + else + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the temperature sensor channel*/ + ADC3_4->CCR |= ADC34_CCR_TSEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the temperature sensor channel*/ + ADC3_4->CCR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC34_CCR_TSEN; + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Vrefint channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the Vrefint. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_VrefintCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Vrefint channel*/ + ADC1_2->CCR |= ADC12_CCR_VREFEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Vrefint channel*/ + ADC1_2->CCR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC12_CCR_VREFEN; + } + } + else + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Vrefint channel*/ + ADC3_4->CCR |= ADC34_CCR_VREFEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Vrefint channel*/ + ADC3_4->CCR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC34_CCR_VREFEN; + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Vbat channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the Vbat. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_VbatCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Vbat channel*/ + ADC1_2->CCR |= ADC12_CCR_VBATEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Vbat channel*/ + ADC1_2->CCR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC12_CCR_VBATEN; + } + } + else + { + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the Vbat channel*/ + ADC3_4->CCR |= ADC34_CCR_VBATEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the Vbat channel*/ + ADC3_4->CCR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC34_CCR_VBATEN; + } + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group4 Regular Channels Configuration functions + * @brief Regular Channels Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Channels Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + + [..] This section provides functions allowing to manage the ADC regular channels. + + [..] To configure a regular sequence of channels use: + (#) ADC_RegularChannelConfig() + this fuction allows: + (++) Configure the rank in the regular group sequencer for each channel + (++) Configure the sampling time for each channel + + (#) ADC_RegularChannelSequencerLengthConfig() to set the length of the regular sequencer + + [..] The regular trigger is configured using the following functions: + (#) ADC_SelectExternalTrigger() + (#) ADC_ExternalTriggerPolarityConfig() + + [..] The start and the stop conversion are controlled by: + (#) ADC_StartConversion() + (#) ADC_StopConversion() + + [..] + (@)Please Note that the following features for regular channels are configurated + using the ADC_Init() function : + (++) continuous mode activation + (++) Resolution + (++) Data Alignement + (++) Overrun Mode. + + [..] Get the conversion data: This subsection provides an important function in + the ADC peripheral since it returns the converted data of the current + regular channel. When the Conversion value is read, the EOC Flag is + automatically cleared. + + [..] To configure the discontinous mode, the following functions should be used: + (#) ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig() to configure the number of discontinuous channel to be converted. + (#) ADC_DiscModeCmd() to enable the discontinuous mode. + + [..] To configure and enable/disable the Channel offset use the functions: + (++) ADC_SetChannelOffset1() + (++) ADC_SetChannelOffset2() + (++) ADC_SetChannelOffset3() + (++) ADC_SetChannelOffset4() + (++) ADC_ChannelOffset1Cmd() + (++) ADC_ChannelOffset2Cmd() + (++) ADC_ChannelOffset3Cmd() + (++) ADC_ChannelOffset4Cmd() + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures for the selected ADC regular channel its corresponding + * rank in the sequencer and its sample time. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @param Rank: The rank in the regular group sequencer. This parameter must be between 1 to 16. + * @param ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the selected channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5: Sample time equal to 1.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_2Cycles5: Sample time equal to 2.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_4Cycles5: Sample time equal to 4.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5: Sample time equal to 7.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_19Cycles5: Sample time equal to 19.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_61Cycles5: Sample time equal to 61.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_181Cycles5: Sample time equal to 181.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_601Cycles5: Sample time equal to 601.5 cycles + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_RegularChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint8_t Rank, uint8_t ADC_SampleTime) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime)); + + /* Regular sequence configuration */ + /* For Rank 1 to 4 */ + if (Rank < 5) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = 0x1F << (6 * (Rank )); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)(ADC_Channel) << (6 * (Rank)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR1 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 5 to 9 */ + else if (Rank < 10) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = ADC_SQR2_SQ5 << (6 * (Rank - 5)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)(ADC_Channel) << (6 * (Rank - 5)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR2 = tmpreg1; + } + /* For Rank 10 to 14 */ + else if (Rank < 15) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR3; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = ADC_SQR3_SQ10 << (6 * (Rank - 10)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)(ADC_Channel) << (6 * (Rank - 10)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR3 = tmpreg1; + } + else + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SQR4; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = ADC_SQR3_SQ15 << (6 * (Rank - 15)); + /* Clear the old SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + tmpreg2 = (uint32_t)(ADC_Channel) << (6 * (Rank - 15)); + /* Set the SQx bits for the selected rank */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->SQR4 = tmpreg1; + } + + /* Channel sampling configuration */ + /* if ADC_Channel_10 ... ADC_Channel_18 is selected */ + if (ADC_Channel > ADC_Channel_9) + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR2; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = ADC_SMPR2_SMP10 << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + /* Clear the old channel sample time */ + ADCx->SMPR2 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + ADCx->SMPR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 10)); + + } + else /* ADC_Channel include in ADC_Channel_[0..9] */ + { + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->SMPR1; + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg2 = ADC_SMPR1_SMP1 << (3 * (ADC_Channel - 1)); + /* Clear the old channel sample time */ + ADCx->SMPR1 &= ~tmpreg2; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + ADCx->SMPR1 |= (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_Channel)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the ADC regular channel sequence lenght. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param SequenceLength: The Regular sequence length. This parameter must be between 1 to 16. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_RegularChannelSequencerLengthConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t SequencerLength) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Configure the ADC sequence lenght */ + ADCx->SQR1 &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_SQR1_L; + ADCx->SQR1 |= (uint32_t)(SequencerLength - 1); +} + +/** + * @brief External Trigger Enable and Polarity Selection for regular channels. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent: ADC external Trigger source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event0: External trigger event 0 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event1: External trigger event 1 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event2: External trigger event 2 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event3: External trigger event 3 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event4: External trigger event 4 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event5: External trigger event 5 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event6: External trigger event 6 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event7: External trigger event 7 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event8: External trigger event 8 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event9: External trigger event 9 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event10: External trigger event 10 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event11: External trigger event 11 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event12: External trigger event 12 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event13: External trigger event 13 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event14: External trigger event 14 + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigger_Event15: External trigger event 15 + * @param ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge: ADC external Trigger Polarity. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_OFF: Hardware trigger detection disabled + * (conversions can be launched by software) + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_RisingEdge: Hardware trigger detection on the rising edge + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_FallingEdge: Hardware trigger detection on the falling edge + * @arg ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge_BothEdge: Hardware trigger detection on both the rising and falling edges + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ExternalTriggerConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent, uint16_t ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_EXT_TRIG(ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent)); + assert_param(IS_EXTERNALTRIG_EDGE(ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge)); + + /* Disable the selected ADC conversion on external event */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~(ADC_CFGR_EXTEN | ADC_CFGR_EXTSEL); + ADCx->CFGR |= (uint32_t)(ADC_ExternalTrigEventEdge | ADC_ExternalTrigConvEvent); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected ADC start conversion . + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_StartConversion(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the ADSTART bit */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_ADSTART; +} + +/** + * @brief Gets the selected ADC start conversion Status. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval The new state of ADC start conversion (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetStartConversionStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + /* Check the status of ADSTART bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR & ADC_CR_ADSTART) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* ADSTART bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADSTART bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the ADSTART bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Stops the selected ADC ongoing conversion. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_StopConversion(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the ADSTP bit */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_ADSTP; +} + + +/** + * @brief Configures the discontinuous mode for the selected ADC regular + * group channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param Number: specifies the discontinuous mode regular channel + * count value. This number must be between 1 and 8. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t Number) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + uint32_t tmpreg2 = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_REGULAR_DISC_NUMBER(Number)); + /* Get the old register value */ + tmpreg1 = ADCx->CFGR; + /* Clear the old discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg1 &= ~(uint32_t)(ADC_CFGR_DISCNUM); + /* Set the discontinuous mode channel count */ + tmpreg2 = Number - 1; + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << 17; + /* Store the new register value */ + ADCx->CFGR = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the discontinuous mode on regular group + * channel for the specified ADC + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode + * on regular group channel. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CFGR |= ADC_CFGR_DISCEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC regular discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~(uint32_t)(ADC_CFGR_DISCEN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the last ADCx conversion result data for regular channel. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval The Data conversion value. + */ +uint16_t ADC_GetConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + /* Return the selected ADC conversion value */ + return (uint16_t) ADCx->DR; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the last ADC1, ADC2, ADC3 and ADC4 regular conversions results + * data in the selected dual mode. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval The Data conversion value. + * @note In dual mode, the value returned by this function is as following + * Data[15:0] : these bits contain the regular data of the Master ADC. + * Data[31:16]: these bits contain the regular data of the Slave ADC. + */ +uint32_t ADC_GetDualModeConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx== ADC2)) + { + /* Get the dual mode conversion value */ + tmpreg1 = ADC1_2->CDR; + } + else + { + /* Get the dual mode conversion value */ + tmpreg1 = ADC3_4->CDR; + } + /* Return the dual mode conversion value */ + return (uint32_t) tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Set the ADC channels conversion value offset1 + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @param Offset: the offset value for the selected ADC Channel + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SetChannelOffset1(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + /* Select the Channel */ + ADCx->OFR1 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR1_OFFSET1_CH; + ADCx->OFR1 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)ADC_Channel << 26); + + /* Set the data offset */ + ADCx->OFR1 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR1_OFFSET1; + ADCx->OFR1 |= (uint32_t)Offset; +} + +/** + * @brief Set the ADC channels conversion value offset2 + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @param Offset: the offset value for the selected ADC Channel + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SetChannelOffset2(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + /* Select the Channel */ + ADCx->OFR2 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR2_OFFSET2_CH; + ADCx->OFR2 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)ADC_Channel << 26); + + /* Set the data offset */ + ADCx->OFR2 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR2_OFFSET2; + ADCx->OFR2 |= (uint32_t)Offset; +} + +/** + * @brief Set the ADC channels conversion value offset3 + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @param Offset: the offset value for the selected ADC Channel + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SetChannelOffset3(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + /* Select the Channel */ + ADCx->OFR3 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR3_OFFSET3_CH; + ADCx->OFR3 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)ADC_Channel << 26); + + /* Set the data offset */ + ADCx->OFR3 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR3_OFFSET3; + ADCx->OFR3 |= (uint32_t)Offset; +} + +/** + * @brief Set the ADC channels conversion value offset4 + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_Channel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_Channel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @param Offset: the offset value for the selected ADC Channel + * This parameter must be a 12bit value. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_SetChannelOffset4(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channel, uint16_t Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CHANNEL(ADC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + /* Select the Channel */ + ADCx->OFR4 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR4_OFFSET4_CH; + ADCx->OFR4 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)ADC_Channel << 26); + + /* Set the data offset */ + ADCx->OFR4 &= ~ (uint32_t) ADC_OFR4_OFFSET4; + ADCx->OFR4 |= (uint32_t)Offset; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Offset1. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx offset1. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ChannelOffset1Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR1 |= ADC_OFR1_OFFSET1_EN; + } + else + { + /* Reset the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR1 &= ~(ADC_OFR1_OFFSET1_EN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Offset2. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx offset2. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ChannelOffset2Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR2 |= ADC_OFR2_OFFSET2_EN; + } + else + { + /* Reset the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR2 &= ~(ADC_OFR2_OFFSET2_EN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Offset3. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx offset3. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ChannelOffset3Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR3 |= ADC_OFR3_OFFSET3_EN; + } + else + { + /* Reset the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR3 &= ~(ADC_OFR3_OFFSET3_EN); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Offset4. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the ADCx offset4. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ChannelOffset4Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Set the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR4 |= ADC_OFR4_OFFSET4_EN; + } + else + { + /* Reset the OFFSET1_EN bit */ + ADCx->OFR4 &= ~(ADC_OFR4_OFFSET4_EN); + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group5 Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions + * @brief Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA for ADC regular + channels. Since converted regular channel values are stored into a unique data register, + it is useful to use DMA for conversion of more than one regular channel. This + avoids the loss of the data already stored in the ADC Data register. + + (#) ADC_DMACmd() function is used to enable the ADC DMA mode, after each + conversion of a regular channel, a DMA request is generated. + (#) ADC_DMAConfig() function is used to select between the oneshot DMA mode + or the circular DMA mode + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC DMA request. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC DMA transfer. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DMACmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC DMA request */ + ADCx->CFGR |= ADC_CFGR_DMAEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC DMA request */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_CFGR_DMAEN; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC DMA request. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC DMA transfer. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_DMAConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_DMAMode) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_DMA_MODE(ADC_DMAMode)); + + /* Set or reset the DMACFG bit */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~(uint32_t)ADC_CFGR_DMACFG; + ADCx->CFGR |= ADC_DMAMode; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group6 Injected channels Configuration functions + * @brief Injected channels Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Injected channels Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + + [..] This section provide functions allowing to manage the ADC Injected channels, + it is composed of : + + (#) Configuration functions for Injected channels sample time + (#) Functions to start and stop the injected conversion + (#) unction to select the discontinuous mode + (#) Function to get the Specified Injected channel conversion data: This subsection + provides an important function in the ADC peripheral since it returns the + converted data of the specific injected channel. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures for the selected ADC injected channel its corresponding + * sample time. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_Channel: the ADC channel to configure. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_1: ADC Channel1 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_2: ADC Channel2 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_3: ADC Channel3 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_4: ADC Channel4 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_5: ADC Channel5 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_6: ADC Channel6 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_7: ADC Channel7 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_8: ADC Channel8 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_9: ADC Channel9 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_10: ADC Channel10 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_11: ADC Channel11 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_12: ADC Channel12 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_13: ADC Channel13 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_14: ADC Channel14 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_15: ADC Channel15 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_16: ADC Channel16 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_17: ADC Channel17 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedChannel_18: ADC Channel18 selected + * @param ADC_SampleTime: The sample time value to be set for the selected channel. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_1Cycles5: Sample time equal to 1.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_2Cycles5: Sample time equal to 2.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_4Cycles5: Sample time equal to 4.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_7Cycles5: Sample time equal to 7.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_19Cycles5: Sample time equal to 19.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_61Cycles5: Sample time equal to 61.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_181Cycles5: Sample time equal to 181.5 cycles + * @arg ADC_SampleTime_601Cycles5: Sample time equal to 601.5 cycles + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_InjectedChannelSampleTimeConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_InjectedChannel, uint8_t ADC_SampleTime) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_CHANNEL(ADC_InjectedChannel)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_SAMPLE_TIME(ADC_SampleTime)); + + /* Channel sampling configuration */ + /* if ADC_InjectedChannel_10 ... ADC_InjectedChannel_18 is selected */ + if (ADC_InjectedChannel > ADC_InjectedChannel_9) + { + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg1 = ADC_SMPR2_SMP10 << (3 * (ADC_InjectedChannel - 10)); + /* Clear the old channel sample time */ + ADCx->SMPR2 &= ~tmpreg1; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + ADCx->SMPR2 |= (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_InjectedChannel - 10)); + + } + else /* ADC_InjectedChannel include in ADC_InjectedChannel_[0..9] */ + { + /* Calculate the mask to clear */ + tmpreg1 = ADC_SMPR1_SMP1 << (3 * (ADC_InjectedChannel - 1)); + /* Clear the old channel sample time */ + ADCx->SMPR1 &= ~tmpreg1; + /* Calculate the mask to set */ + ADCx->SMPR1 |= (uint32_t)ADC_SampleTime << (3 * (ADC_InjectedChannel)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected ADC start of the injected + * channels conversion. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC software start injected conversion. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_StartInjectedConversion(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Enable the selected ADC conversion for injected group on external event and start the selected + ADC injected conversion */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_JADSTART; +} + +/** + * @brief Stops the selected ADC ongoing injected conversion. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_StopInjectedConversion(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Set the JADSTP bit */ + ADCx->CR |= ADC_CR_JADSTP; +} + +/** + * @brief Gets the selected ADC Software start injected conversion Status. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @retval The new state of ADC start injected conversion (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetStartInjectedConversionStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + + /* Check the status of JADSTART bit */ + if ((ADCx->CR & ADC_CR_JADSTART) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* JADSTART bit is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* JADSTART bit is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the JADSTART bit status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected ADC automatic injected group + * conversion after regular one. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC auto injected conversion + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */ + ADCx->CFGR |= ADC_CFGR_JAUTO; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC automatic injected group conversion */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~ADC_CFGR_JAUTO; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the discontinuous mode for injected group + * channel for the specified ADC + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the selected ADC discontinuous mode + * on injected group channel. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CFGR |= ADC_CFGR_JDISCEN; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC injected discontinuous mode */ + ADCx->CFGR &= ~ADC_CFGR_JDISCEN; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the ADC injected channel conversion result + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_InjectedSequence: the converted ADC injected sequence. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_InjectedSequence_1: Injected Sequence1 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedSequence_2: Injected Sequence2 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedSequence_3: Injected Sequence3 selected + * @arg ADC_InjectedSequence_4: Injected Sequence4 selected + * @retval The Data conversion value. + */ +uint16_t ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_InjectedSequence) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_INJECTED_SEQUENCE(ADC_InjectedSequence)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)ADCx; + tmp += ((ADC_InjectedSequence - 1 )<< 2) + JDR_Offset; + + /* Returns the selected injected channel conversion data value */ + return (uint16_t) (*(__IO uint32_t*) tmp); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup ADC_Group7 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the ADC Interrupts, get + the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits. + + [..] The ADC provide 11 Interrupts sources and 11 Flags which can be divided into 3 groups: + + (#) Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels + (##)Flags + (+) ADC_FLAG_RDY: ADC Ready flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag. + (+) ADC_FLAG_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_OVR: ADC overrun flag + + (##) Interrupts + (+) ADC_IT_RDY: ADC Ready interrupt source + (+) ADC_IT_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling interrupt source + (+) ADC_IT_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion interrupt source + (+) ADC_IT_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions interrupt + (+) ADC_IT_OVR: ADC overrun interrupt source + + + (#) Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels + (##)Flags + (+) ADC_FLAG_JEOC: ADC Ready flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_JEOS: ADC End of Sampling flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_JQOVF: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag. + + (##) Interrupts + (+) ADC_IT_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion interrupt source + (+) ADC_IT_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions interrupt source + (+) ADC_IT_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow interrupt source + + (#) General Flags and Interrupts for the ADC + (##)Flags + (+) ADC_FLAG_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 flag + + (##)Flags + (+) ADC_IT_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt source + (+) ADC_IT_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt source + (+) ADC_IT_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt source + + (#) Flags for ADC dual mode + (##)Flags for Master + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY: ADC master Ready (ADRDY) flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP: ADC master End of Sampling flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC: ADC master End of Regular Conversion flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS: ADC master End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR: ADC master overrun flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC: ADC master End of Injected Conversion flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS: ADC master End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1: ADC master Analog watchdog 1 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2: ADC master Analog watchdog 2 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3: ADC master Analog watchdog 3 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF: ADC master Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + + (##) Flags for Slave + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY: ADC slave Ready (ADRDY) flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP: ADC slave End of Sampling flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC: ADC slave End of Regular Conversion flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS: ADC slave End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR: ADC slave overrun flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC: ADC slave End of Injected Conversion flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS: ADC slave End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1: ADC slave Analog watchdog 1 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2: ADC slave Analog watchdog 2 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3: ADC slave Analog watchdog 3 flag + (+) ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF: ADC slave Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + + The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage + the ADC controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode. + + In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + - ADC_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur. + - ADC_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events. + + In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + - ADC_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source. + - ADC_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs. + - ADC_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit + (corresponding Flag). +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified ADC interrupts. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg ADC_IT_RDY: ADC Ready (ADRDY) interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_OVR: ADC overrun interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow interrupt source + * @param NewState: new state of the specified ADC interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ITConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected ADC interrupts */ + ADCx->IER |= ADC_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected ADC interrupts */ + ADCx->IER &= (~(uint32_t)ADC_IT); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified ADC flag is set or not. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_FLAG_RDY: ADC Ready (ADRDY) flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_OVR: ADC overrun flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + * @retval The new state of ADC_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetFlagStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_FLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified ADC flag */ + if ((ADCx->ISR & ADC_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* ADC_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADC_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the ADC_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the ADCx's pending flags. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg ADC_FLAG_RDY: ADC Ready (ADRDY) flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_OVR: ADC overrun flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ClearFlag(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CLEAR_FLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + /* Clear the selected ADC flags */ + ADCx->ISR = (uint32_t)ADC_FLAG; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified ADC flag is set or not. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_FLAG: specifies the master or slave flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY: ADC master Ready (ADRDY) flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP: ADC master End of Sampling flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC: ADC master End of Regular Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS: ADC master End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR: ADC master overrun flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC: ADC master End of Injected Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS: ADC master End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1: ADC master Analog watchdog 1 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2: ADC master Analog watchdog 2 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3: ADC master Analog watchdog 3 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF: ADC master Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY: ADC slave Ready (ADRDY) flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP: ADC slave End of Sampling flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC: ADC slave End of Regular Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS: ADC slave End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR: ADC slave overrun flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC: ADC slave End of Injected Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS: ADC slave End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1: ADC slave Analog watchdog 1 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2: ADC slave Analog watchdog 2 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3: ADC slave Analog watchdog 3 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF: ADC slave Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + * @retval The new state of ADC_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus ADC_GetCommonFlagStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_FLAG) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0; + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_COMMONFLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + tmpreg1 = ADC1_2->CSR; + } + else + { + tmpreg1 = ADC3_4->CSR; + } + /* Check the status of the specified ADC flag */ + if ((tmpreg1 & ADC_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* ADC_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* ADC_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the ADC_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the ADCx's pending flags. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_FLAG: specifies the master or slave flag to clear. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTRDY: ADC master Ready (ADRDY) flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTEOSMP: ADC master End of Sampling flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTEOC: ADC master End of Regular Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTEOS: ADC master End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTOVR: ADC master overrun flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOC: ADC master End of Injected Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTJEOS: ADC master End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD1: ADC master Analog watchdog 1 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD2: ADC master Analog watchdog 2 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTAWD3: ADC master Analog watchdog 3 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_MSTJQOVF: ADC master Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVRDY: ADC slave Ready (ADRDY) flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVEOSMP: ADC slave End of Sampling flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVEOC: ADC slave End of Regular Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVEOS: ADC slave End of Regular sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVOVR: ADC slave overrun flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOC: ADC slave End of Injected Conversion flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVJEOS: ADC slave End of Injected sequence of Conversions flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD1: ADC slave Analog watchdog 1 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD2: ADC slave Analog watchdog 2 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVAWD3: ADC slave Analog watchdog 3 flag + * @arg ADC_FLAG_SLVJQOVF: ADC slave Injected Context Queue Overflow flag + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ClearCommonFlag(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_CLEAR_COMMONFLAG(ADC_FLAG)); + + if((ADCx == ADC1) || (ADCx == ADC2)) + { + /* Clear the selected ADC flags */ + ADC1_2->CSR |= (uint32_t)ADC_FLAG; + } + else + { + /* Clear the selected ADC flags */ + ADC3_4->CSR |= (uint32_t)ADC_FLAG; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified ADC interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg ADC_IT_RDY: ADC Ready (ADRDY) interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_OVR: ADC overrun interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow interrupt source + * @retval The new state of ADC_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus ADC_GetITStatus(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint16_t itstatus = 0x0, itenable = 0x0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_GET_IT(ADC_IT)); + + itstatus = ADCx->ISR & ADC_IT; + + itenable = ADCx->IER & ADC_IT; + if ((itstatus != (uint32_t)RESET) && (itenable != (uint32_t)RESET)) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the ADCx's interrupt pending bits. + * @param ADCx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the ADC peripheral. + * @param ADC_IT: specifies the ADC interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg ADC_IT_RDY: ADC Ready (ADRDY) interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOSMP: ADC End of Sampling interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOC: ADC End of Regular Conversion interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_EOS: ADC End of Regular sequence of Conversions interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_OVR: ADC overrun interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOC: ADC End of Injected Conversion interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JEOS: ADC End of Injected sequence of Conversions interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD1: ADC Analog watchdog 1 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD2: ADC Analog watchdog 2 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_AWD3: ADC Analog watchdog 3 interrupt source + * @arg ADC_IT_JQOVF: ADC Injected Context Queue Overflow interrupt source + * @retval None + */ +void ADC_ClearITPendingBit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint32_t ADC_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_ADC_ALL_PERIPH(ADCx)); + assert_param(IS_ADC_IT(ADC_IT)); + /* Clear the selected ADC interrupt pending bit */ + ADCx->ISR |= (uint32_t)ADC_IT; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_can.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_can.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d9848c --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_can.c @@ -0,0 +1,1629 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_can.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Controller area network (CAN) peripheral: + * + Initialization and Configuration + * + CAN Frames Transmission + * + CAN Frames Reception + * + Operation modes switch + * + Error management + * + Interrupts and flags + * + @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable the CAN controller interface clock using + RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1, ENABLE); + (#) CAN pins configuration: + (++) Enable the clock for the CAN GPIOs using the following function: + RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOx, ENABLE); + (++) Connect the involved CAN pins to AF9 using the following function + GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_CANx); + (++) Configure these CAN pins in alternate function mode by calling + the function GPIO_Init(); + (#) Initialise and configure the CAN using CAN_Init() and + CAN_FilterInit() functions. + (#) Transmit the desired CAN frame using CAN_Transmit() function. + (#) Check the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_TransmitStatus() function. + (#) Cancel the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_CancelTransmit() function. + (#) Receive a CAN frame using CAN_Recieve() function. + (#) Release the receive FIFOs using CAN_FIFORelease() function. + (#) Return the number of pending received frames using CAN_MessagePending() function. + (#) To control CAN events you can use one of the following two methods: + (++) Check on CAN flags using the CAN_GetFlagStatus() function. + (++) Use CAN interrupts through the function CAN_ITConfig() at initialization + phase and CAN_GetITStatus() function into interrupt routines to check + if the event has occurred or not. + After checking on a flag you should clear it using CAN_ClearFlag() + function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should clear it + using CAN_ClearITPendingBit() function. + + @endverbatim + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_can.h" +#include "stm32f30x_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup CAN + * @brief CAN driver modules + * @{ + */ +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* CAN Master Control Register bits */ +#define MCR_DBF ((uint32_t)0x00010000) /* software master reset */ + +/* CAN Mailbox Transmit Request */ +#define TMIDxR_TXRQ ((uint32_t)0x00000001) /* Transmit mailbox request */ + +/* CAN Filter Master Register bits */ +#define FMR_FINIT ((uint32_t)0x00000001) /* Filter init mode */ + +/* Time out for INAK bit */ +#define INAK_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t)0x00FFFFFF) +/* Time out for SLAK bit */ +#define SLAK_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t)0x00FFFFFF) + +/* Flags in TSR register */ +#define CAN_FLAGS_TSR ((uint32_t)0x08000000) +/* Flags in RF1R register */ +#define CAN_FLAGS_RF1R ((uint32_t)0x04000000) +/* Flags in RF0R register */ +#define CAN_FLAGS_RF0R ((uint32_t)0x02000000) +/* Flags in MSR register */ +#define CAN_FLAGS_MSR ((uint32_t)0x01000000) +/* Flags in ESR register */ +#define CAN_FLAGS_ESR ((uint32_t)0x00F00000) + +/* Mailboxes definition */ +#define CAN_TXMAILBOX_0 ((uint8_t)0x00) +#define CAN_TXMAILBOX_1 ((uint8_t)0x01) +#define CAN_TXMAILBOX_2 ((uint8_t)0x02) + +#define CAN_MODE_MASK ((uint32_t) 0x00000003) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +static ITStatus CheckITStatus(uint32_t CAN_Reg, uint32_t It_Bit); + +/** @defgroup CAN_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup CAN_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to: + (+) Initialize the CAN peripherals : Prescaler, operating mode, the maximum + number of time quanta to perform resynchronization, the number of time + quanta in Bit Segment 1 and 2 and many other modes. + (+) Configure the CAN reception filter. + (+) Select the start bank filter for slave CAN. + (+) Enable or disable the Debug Freeze mode for CAN. + (+) Enable or disable the CAN Time Trigger Operation communication mode. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the CAN peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @retval None. + */ +void CAN_DeInit(CAN_TypeDef* CANx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + + /* Enable CAN1 reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1, ENABLE); + /* Release CAN1 from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the CAN peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the CAN_InitStruct. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @param CAN_InitStruct: pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the CAN peripheral. + * @retval Constant indicates initialization succeed which will be + * CAN_InitStatus_Failed or CAN_InitStatus_Success. + */ +uint8_t CAN_Init(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, CAN_InitTypeDef* CAN_InitStruct) +{ + uint8_t InitStatus = CAN_InitStatus_Failed; + __IO uint32_t wait_ack = 0x00000000; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_MODE(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_SJW(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_BS1(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_BS2(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_PRESCALER(CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler)); + + /* Exit from sleep mode */ + CANx->MCR &= (~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_SLEEP); + + /* Request initialisation */ + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_INRQ ; + + /* Wait the acknowledge */ + while (((CANx->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) != CAN_MSR_INAK) && (wait_ack != INAK_TIMEOUT)) + { + wait_ack++; + } + + /* Check acknowledge */ + if ((CANx->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) != CAN_MSR_INAK) + { + InitStatus = CAN_InitStatus_Failed; + } + else + { + /* Set the time triggered communication mode */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM == ENABLE) + { + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_TTCM; + } + else + { + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_TTCM; + } + + /* Set the automatic bus-off management */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM == ENABLE) + { + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_ABOM; + } + else + { + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_ABOM; + } + + /* Set the automatic wake-up mode */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM == ENABLE) + { + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_AWUM; + } + else + { + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_AWUM; + } + + /* Set the no automatic retransmission */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART == ENABLE) + { + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_NART; + } + else + { + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_NART; + } + + /* Set the receive FIFO locked mode */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM == ENABLE) + { + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_RFLM; + } + else + { + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_RFLM; + } + + /* Set the transmit FIFO priority */ + if (CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP == ENABLE) + { + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_TXFP; + } + else + { + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_TXFP; + } + + /* Set the bit timing register */ + CANx->BTR = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode << 30) | \ + ((uint32_t)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW << 24) | \ + ((uint32_t)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1 << 16) | \ + ((uint32_t)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2 << 20) | \ + ((uint32_t)CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler - 1); + + /* Request leave initialisation */ + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_INRQ; + + /* Wait the acknowledge */ + wait_ack = 0; + + while (((CANx->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) == CAN_MSR_INAK) && (wait_ack != INAK_TIMEOUT)) + { + wait_ack++; + } + + /* ...and check acknowledged */ + if ((CANx->MSR & CAN_MSR_INAK) == CAN_MSR_INAK) + { + InitStatus = CAN_InitStatus_Failed; + } + else + { + InitStatus = CAN_InitStatus_Success ; + } + } + + /* At this step, return the status of initialization */ + return InitStatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the CAN reception filter according to the specified + * parameters in the CAN_FilterInitStruct. + * @param CAN_FilterInitStruct: pointer to a CAN_FilterInitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_FilterInit(CAN_FilterInitTypeDef* CAN_FilterInitStruct) +{ + uint32_t filter_number_bit_pos = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_NUMBER(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_MODE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_SCALE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FILTER_FIFO(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterActivation)); + + filter_number_bit_pos = ((uint32_t)1) << CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber; + + /* Initialisation mode for the filter */ + CAN1->FMR |= FMR_FINIT; + + /* Filter Deactivation */ + CAN1->FA1R &= ~(uint32_t)filter_number_bit_pos; + + /* Filter Scale */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale == CAN_FilterScale_16bit) + { + /* 16-bit scale for the filter */ + CAN1->FS1R &= ~(uint32_t)filter_number_bit_pos; + + /* First 16-bit identifier and First 16-bit mask */ + /* Or First 16-bit identifier and Second 16-bit identifier */ + CAN1->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR1 = + ((0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdLow) << 16) | + (0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdLow); + + /* Second 16-bit identifier and Second 16-bit mask */ + /* Or Third 16-bit identifier and Fourth 16-bit identifier */ + CAN1->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR2 = + ((0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh) << 16) | + (0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdHigh); + } + + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterScale == CAN_FilterScale_32bit) + { + /* 32-bit scale for the filter */ + CAN1->FS1R |= filter_number_bit_pos; + /* 32-bit identifier or First 32-bit identifier */ + CAN1->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR1 = + ((0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdHigh) << 16) | + (0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterIdLow); + /* 32-bit mask or Second 32-bit identifier */ + CAN1->sFilterRegister[CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterNumber].FR2 = + ((0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdHigh) << 16) | + (0x0000FFFF & (uint32_t)CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMaskIdLow); + } + + /* Filter Mode */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode == CAN_FilterMode_IdMask) + { + /*Id/Mask mode for the filter*/ + CAN1->FM1R &= ~(uint32_t)filter_number_bit_pos; + } + else /* CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterMode == CAN_FilterMode_IdList */ + { + /*Identifier list mode for the filter*/ + CAN1->FM1R |= (uint32_t)filter_number_bit_pos; + } + + /* Filter FIFO assignment */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment == CAN_Filter_FIFO0) + { + /* FIFO 0 assignation for the filter */ + CAN1->FFA1R &= ~(uint32_t)filter_number_bit_pos; + } + + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterFIFOAssignment == CAN_Filter_FIFO1) + { + /* FIFO 1 assignation for the filter */ + CAN1->FFA1R |= (uint32_t)filter_number_bit_pos; + } + + /* Filter activation */ + if (CAN_FilterInitStruct->CAN_FilterActivation == ENABLE) + { + CAN1->FA1R |= filter_number_bit_pos; + } + + /* Leave the initialisation mode for the filter */ + CAN1->FMR &= ~FMR_FINIT; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each CAN_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param CAN_InitStruct: pointer to a CAN_InitTypeDef structure which ill be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_StructInit(CAN_InitTypeDef* CAN_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset CAN init structure parameters values */ + + /* Initialize the time triggered communication mode */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TTCM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the automatic bus-off management */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_ABOM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the automatic wake-up mode */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_AWUM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the no automatic retransmission */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_NART = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the receive FIFO locked mode */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_RFLM = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the transmit FIFO priority */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_TXFP = DISABLE; + + /* Initialize the CAN_Mode member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Mode = CAN_Mode_Normal; + + /* Initialize the CAN_SJW member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_SJW = CAN_SJW_1tq; + + /* Initialize the CAN_BS1 member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS1 = CAN_BS1_4tq; + + /* Initialize the CAN_BS2 member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_BS2 = CAN_BS2_3tq; + + /* Initialize the CAN_Prescaler member */ + CAN_InitStruct->CAN_Prescaler = 1; +} + +/** + * @brief Select the start bank filter for slave CAN. + * @param CAN_BankNumber: Select the start slave bank filter from 1..27. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_SlaveStartBank(uint8_t CAN_BankNumber) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_BANKNUMBER(CAN_BankNumber)); + + /* Enter Initialisation mode for the filter */ + CAN1->FMR |= FMR_FINIT; + + /* Select the start slave bank */ + CAN1->FMR &= (uint32_t)0xFFFFC0F1 ; + CAN1->FMR |= (uint32_t)(CAN_BankNumber)<<8; + + /* Leave Initialisation mode for the filter */ + CAN1->FMR &= ~FMR_FINIT; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the DBG Freeze for CAN. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param NewState: new state of the CAN peripheral. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE (CAN reception/transmission is frozen + * during debug. Reception FIFOs can still be accessed/controlled normally) + * or DISABLE (CAN is working during debug). + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_DBGFreeze(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable Debug Freeze */ + CANx->MCR |= MCR_DBF; + } + else + { + /* Disable Debug Freeze */ + CANx->MCR &= ~MCR_DBF; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the CAN Time TriggerOperation communication mode. + * @note DLC must be programmed as 8 in order Time Stamp (2 bytes) to be + * sent over the CAN bus. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param NewState: Mode new state. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * When enabled, Time stamp (TIME[15:0]) value is sent in the last two + * data bytes of the 8-byte message: TIME[7:0] in data byte 6 and TIME[15:8] + * in data byte 7. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_TTComModeCmd(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the TTCM mode */ + CANx->MCR |= CAN_MCR_TTCM; + + /* Set TGT bits */ + CANx->sTxMailBox[0].TDTR |= ((uint32_t)CAN_TDT0R_TGT); + CANx->sTxMailBox[1].TDTR |= ((uint32_t)CAN_TDT1R_TGT); + CANx->sTxMailBox[2].TDTR |= ((uint32_t)CAN_TDT2R_TGT); + } + else + { + /* Disable the TTCM mode */ + CANx->MCR &= (uint32_t)(~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_TTCM); + + /* Reset TGT bits */ + CANx->sTxMailBox[0].TDTR &= ((uint32_t)~CAN_TDT0R_TGT); + CANx->sTxMailBox[1].TDTR &= ((uint32_t)~CAN_TDT1R_TGT); + CANx->sTxMailBox[2].TDTR &= ((uint32_t)~CAN_TDT2R_TGT); + } +} +/** + * @} + */ + + +/** @defgroup CAN_Group2 CAN Frames Transmission functions + * @brief CAN Frames Transmission functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### CAN Frames Transmission functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to + (+) Initiate and transmit a CAN frame message (if there is an empty mailbox). + (+) Check the transmission status of a CAN Frame. + (+) Cancel a transmit request. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Initiates and transmits a CAN frame message. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param TxMessage: pointer to a structure which contains CAN Id, CAN DLC and CAN data. + * @retval The number of the mailbox that is used for transmission or + * CAN_TxStatus_NoMailBox if there is no empty mailbox. + */ +uint8_t CAN_Transmit(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, CanTxMsg* TxMessage) +{ + uint8_t transmit_mailbox = 0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_IDTYPE(TxMessage->IDE)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_RTR(TxMessage->RTR)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_DLC(TxMessage->DLC)); + + /* Select one empty transmit mailbox */ + if ((CANx->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME0) == CAN_TSR_TME0) + { + transmit_mailbox = 0; + } + else if ((CANx->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME1) == CAN_TSR_TME1) + { + transmit_mailbox = 1; + } + else if ((CANx->TSR&CAN_TSR_TME2) == CAN_TSR_TME2) + { + transmit_mailbox = 2; + } + else + { + transmit_mailbox = CAN_TxStatus_NoMailBox; + } + + if (transmit_mailbox != CAN_TxStatus_NoMailBox) + { + /* Set up the Id */ + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TIR &= TMIDxR_TXRQ; + if (TxMessage->IDE == CAN_Id_Standard) + { + assert_param(IS_CAN_STDID(TxMessage->StdId)); + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TIR |= ((TxMessage->StdId << 21) | \ + TxMessage->RTR); + } + else + { + assert_param(IS_CAN_EXTID(TxMessage->ExtId)); + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TIR |= ((TxMessage->ExtId << 3) | \ + TxMessage->IDE | \ + TxMessage->RTR); + } + + /* Set up the DLC */ + TxMessage->DLC &= (uint8_t)0x0000000F; + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TDTR &= (uint32_t)0xFFFFFFF0; + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TDTR |= TxMessage->DLC; + + /* Set up the data field */ + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TDLR = (((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[3] << 24) | + ((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[2] << 16) | + ((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[1] << 8) | + ((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[0])); + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TDHR = (((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[7] << 24) | + ((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[6] << 16) | + ((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[5] << 8) | + ((uint32_t)TxMessage->Data[4])); + /* Request transmission */ + CANx->sTxMailBox[transmit_mailbox].TIR |= TMIDxR_TXRQ; + } + return transmit_mailbox; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks the transmission status of a CAN Frame. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @param TransmitMailbox: the number of the mailbox that is used for transmission. + * @retval CAN_TxStatus_Ok if the CAN driver transmits the message, + * CAN_TxStatus_Failed in an other case. + */ +uint8_t CAN_TransmitStatus(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t TransmitMailbox) +{ + uint32_t state = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_TRANSMITMAILBOX(TransmitMailbox)); + + switch (TransmitMailbox) + { + case (CAN_TXMAILBOX_0): + state = CANx->TSR & (CAN_TSR_RQCP0 | CAN_TSR_TXOK0 | CAN_TSR_TME0); + break; + case (CAN_TXMAILBOX_1): + state = CANx->TSR & (CAN_TSR_RQCP1 | CAN_TSR_TXOK1 | CAN_TSR_TME1); + break; + case (CAN_TXMAILBOX_2): + state = CANx->TSR & (CAN_TSR_RQCP2 | CAN_TSR_TXOK2 | CAN_TSR_TME2); + break; + default: + state = CAN_TxStatus_Failed; + break; + } + switch (state) + { + /* transmit pending */ + case (0x0): state = CAN_TxStatus_Pending; + break; + /* transmit failed */ + case (CAN_TSR_RQCP0 | CAN_TSR_TME0): state = CAN_TxStatus_Failed; + break; + case (CAN_TSR_RQCP1 | CAN_TSR_TME1): state = CAN_TxStatus_Failed; + break; + case (CAN_TSR_RQCP2 | CAN_TSR_TME2): state = CAN_TxStatus_Failed; + break; + /* transmit succeeded */ + case (CAN_TSR_RQCP0 | CAN_TSR_TXOK0 | CAN_TSR_TME0):state = CAN_TxStatus_Ok; + break; + case (CAN_TSR_RQCP1 | CAN_TSR_TXOK1 | CAN_TSR_TME1):state = CAN_TxStatus_Ok; + break; + case (CAN_TSR_RQCP2 | CAN_TSR_TXOK2 | CAN_TSR_TME2):state = CAN_TxStatus_Ok; + break; + default: state = CAN_TxStatus_Failed; + break; + } + return (uint8_t) state; +} + +/** + * @brief Cancels a transmit request. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @param Mailbox: Mailbox number. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_CancelTransmit(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t Mailbox) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_TRANSMITMAILBOX(Mailbox)); + /* abort transmission */ + switch (Mailbox) + { + case (CAN_TXMAILBOX_0): CANx->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ0; + break; + case (CAN_TXMAILBOX_1): CANx->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ1; + break; + case (CAN_TXMAILBOX_2): CANx->TSR |= CAN_TSR_ABRQ2; + break; + default: + break; + } +} +/** + * @} + */ + + +/** @defgroup CAN_Group3 CAN Frames Reception functions + * @brief CAN Frames Reception functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### CAN Frames Reception functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to + (+) Receive a correct CAN frame. + (+) Release a specified receive FIFO (2 FIFOs are available). + (+) Return the number of the pending received CAN frames. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Receives a correct CAN frame. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @param FIFONumber: Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1. + * @param RxMessage: pointer to a structure receive frame which contains CAN Id, + * CAN DLC, CAN data and FMI number. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_Receive(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t FIFONumber, CanRxMsg* RxMessage) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber)); + /* Get the Id */ + RxMessage->IDE = (uint8_t)0x04 & CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR; + if (RxMessage->IDE == CAN_Id_Standard) + { + RxMessage->StdId = (uint32_t)0x000007FF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR >> 21); + } + else + { + RxMessage->ExtId = (uint32_t)0x1FFFFFFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR >> 3); + } + + RxMessage->RTR = (uint8_t)0x02 & CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RIR; + /* Get the DLC */ + RxMessage->DLC = (uint8_t)0x0F & CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDTR; + /* Get the FMI */ + RxMessage->FMI = (uint8_t)0xFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDTR >> 8); + /* Get the data field */ + RxMessage->Data[0] = (uint8_t)0xFF & CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR; + RxMessage->Data[1] = (uint8_t)0xFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 8); + RxMessage->Data[2] = (uint8_t)0xFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 16); + RxMessage->Data[3] = (uint8_t)0xFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDLR >> 24); + RxMessage->Data[4] = (uint8_t)0xFF & CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR; + RxMessage->Data[5] = (uint8_t)0xFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 8); + RxMessage->Data[6] = (uint8_t)0xFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 16); + RxMessage->Data[7] = (uint8_t)0xFF & (CANx->sFIFOMailBox[FIFONumber].RDHR >> 24); + /* Release the FIFO */ + /* Release FIFO0 */ + if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO0) + { + CANx->RF0R |= CAN_RF0R_RFOM0; + } + /* Release FIFO1 */ + else /* FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO1 */ + { + CANx->RF1R |= CAN_RF1R_RFOM1; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Releases the specified receive FIFO. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @param FIFONumber: FIFO to release, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_FIFORelease(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t FIFONumber) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber)); + /* Release FIFO0 */ + if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO0) + { + CANx->RF0R |= CAN_RF0R_RFOM0; + } + /* Release FIFO1 */ + else /* FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO1 */ + { + CANx->RF1R |= CAN_RF1R_RFOM1; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the number of pending received messages. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @param FIFONumber: Receive FIFO number, CAN_FIFO0 or CAN_FIFO1. + * @retval NbMessage : which is the number of pending message. + */ +uint8_t CAN_MessagePending(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t FIFONumber) +{ + uint8_t message_pending=0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_FIFO(FIFONumber)); + if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO0) + { + message_pending = (uint8_t)(CANx->RF0R&(uint32_t)0x03); + } + else if (FIFONumber == CAN_FIFO1) + { + message_pending = (uint8_t)(CANx->RF1R&(uint32_t)0x03); + } + else + { + message_pending = 0; + } + return message_pending; +} +/** + * @} + */ + + +/** @defgroup CAN_Group4 CAN Operation modes functions + * @brief CAN Operation modes functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### CAN Operation modes functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to select the CAN Operation modes: + (+) sleep mode. + (+) normal mode. + (+) initialization mode. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + + +/** + * @brief Selects the CAN Operation mode. + * @param CAN_OperatingMode: CAN Operating Mode. + * This parameter can be one of @ref CAN_OperatingMode_TypeDef enumeration. + * @retval status of the requested mode which can be: + * - CAN_ModeStatus_Failed: CAN failed entering the specific mode + * - CAN_ModeStatus_Success: CAN Succeed entering the specific mode + */ +uint8_t CAN_OperatingModeRequest(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t CAN_OperatingMode) +{ + uint8_t status = CAN_ModeStatus_Failed; + + /* Timeout for INAK or also for SLAK bits*/ + uint32_t timeout = INAK_TIMEOUT; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_OPERATING_MODE(CAN_OperatingMode)); + + if (CAN_OperatingMode == CAN_OperatingMode_Initialization) + { + /* Request initialisation */ + CANx->MCR = (uint32_t)((CANx->MCR & (uint32_t)(~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_SLEEP)) | CAN_MCR_INRQ); + + /* Wait the acknowledge */ + while (((CANx->MSR & CAN_MODE_MASK) != CAN_MSR_INAK) && (timeout != 0)) + { + timeout--; + } + if ((CANx->MSR & CAN_MODE_MASK) != CAN_MSR_INAK) + { + status = CAN_ModeStatus_Failed; + } + else + { + status = CAN_ModeStatus_Success; + } + } + else if (CAN_OperatingMode == CAN_OperatingMode_Normal) + { + /* Request leave initialisation and sleep mode and enter Normal mode */ + CANx->MCR &= (uint32_t)(~(CAN_MCR_SLEEP|CAN_MCR_INRQ)); + + /* Wait the acknowledge */ + while (((CANx->MSR & CAN_MODE_MASK) != 0) && (timeout!=0)) + { + timeout--; + } + if ((CANx->MSR & CAN_MODE_MASK) != 0) + { + status = CAN_ModeStatus_Failed; + } + else + { + status = CAN_ModeStatus_Success; + } + } + else if (CAN_OperatingMode == CAN_OperatingMode_Sleep) + { + /* Request Sleep mode */ + CANx->MCR = (uint32_t)((CANx->MCR & (uint32_t)(~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_INRQ)) | CAN_MCR_SLEEP); + + /* Wait the acknowledge */ + while (((CANx->MSR & CAN_MODE_MASK) != CAN_MSR_SLAK) && (timeout!=0)) + { + timeout--; + } + if ((CANx->MSR & CAN_MODE_MASK) != CAN_MSR_SLAK) + { + status = CAN_ModeStatus_Failed; + } + else + { + status = CAN_ModeStatus_Success; + } + } + else + { + status = CAN_ModeStatus_Failed; + } + + return (uint8_t) status; +} + +/** + * @brief Enters the Sleep (low power) mode. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @retval CAN_Sleep_Ok if sleep entered, CAN_Sleep_Failed otherwise. + */ +uint8_t CAN_Sleep(CAN_TypeDef* CANx) +{ + uint8_t sleepstatus = CAN_Sleep_Failed; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + + /* Request Sleep mode */ + CANx->MCR = (((CANx->MCR) & (uint32_t)(~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_INRQ)) | CAN_MCR_SLEEP); + + /* Sleep mode status */ + if ((CANx->MSR & (CAN_MSR_SLAK|CAN_MSR_INAK)) == CAN_MSR_SLAK) + { + /* Sleep mode not entered */ + sleepstatus = CAN_Sleep_Ok; + } + /* return sleep mode status */ + return (uint8_t)sleepstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Wakes up the CAN peripheral from sleep mode . + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @retval CAN_WakeUp_Ok if sleep mode left, CAN_WakeUp_Failed otherwise. + */ +uint8_t CAN_WakeUp(CAN_TypeDef* CANx) +{ + uint32_t wait_slak = SLAK_TIMEOUT; + uint8_t wakeupstatus = CAN_WakeUp_Failed; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + + /* Wake up request */ + CANx->MCR &= ~(uint32_t)CAN_MCR_SLEEP; + + /* Sleep mode status */ + while(((CANx->MSR & CAN_MSR_SLAK) == CAN_MSR_SLAK)&&(wait_slak!=0x00)) + { + wait_slak--; + } + if((CANx->MSR & CAN_MSR_SLAK) != CAN_MSR_SLAK) + { + /* wake up done : Sleep mode exited */ + wakeupstatus = CAN_WakeUp_Ok; + } + /* return wakeup status */ + return (uint8_t)wakeupstatus; +} +/** + * @} + */ + + +/** @defgroup CAN_Group5 CAN Bus Error management functions + * @brief CAN Bus Error management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### CAN Bus Error management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to + (+) Return the CANx's last error code (LEC). + (+) Return the CANx Receive Error Counter (REC). + (+) Return the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC). + [..] + (@) If TEC is greater than 255, The CAN is in bus-off state. + (@) If REC or TEC are greater than 96, an Error warning flag occurs. + (@) If REC or TEC are greater than 127, an Error Passive Flag occurs. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Returns the CANx's last error code (LEC). + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 to select the CAN1 peripheral. + * @retval Error code: + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_NoErr: No Error + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_StuffErr: Stuff Error + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_FormErr: Form Error + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_ACKErr : Acknowledgment Error + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_BitRecessiveErr: Bit Recessive Error + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_BitDominantErr: Bit Dominant Error + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_CRCErr: CRC Error + * - CAN_ERRORCODE_SoftwareSetErr: Software Set Error + */ +uint8_t CAN_GetLastErrorCode(CAN_TypeDef* CANx) +{ + uint8_t errorcode=0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + + /* Get the error code*/ + errorcode = (((uint8_t)CANx->ESR) & (uint8_t)CAN_ESR_LEC); + + /* Return the error code*/ + return errorcode; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the CANx Receive Error Counter (REC). + * @note In case of an error during reception, this counter is incremented + * by 1 or by 8 depending on the error condition as defined by the CAN + * standard. After every successful reception, the counter is + * decremented by 1 or reset to 120 if its value was higher than 128. + * When the counter value exceeds 127, the CAN controller enters the + * error passive state. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @retval CAN Receive Error Counter. + */ +uint8_t CAN_GetReceiveErrorCounter(CAN_TypeDef* CANx) +{ + uint8_t counter=0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + + /* Get the Receive Error Counter*/ + counter = (uint8_t)((CANx->ESR & CAN_ESR_REC)>> 24); + + /* Return the Receive Error Counter*/ + return counter; +} + + +/** + * @brief Returns the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC). + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @retval LSB of the 9-bit CAN Transmit Error Counter. + */ +uint8_t CAN_GetLSBTransmitErrorCounter(CAN_TypeDef* CANx) +{ + uint8_t counter=0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + + /* Get the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC) */ + counter = (uint8_t)((CANx->ESR & CAN_ESR_TEC)>> 16); + + /* Return the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC) */ + return counter; +} +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup CAN_Group6 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the CAN Interrupts + and to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits. + [..] The CAN provides 14 Interrupts sources and 15 Flags: + + *** Flags *** + ============= + [..] The 15 flags can be divided on 4 groups: + (+) Transmit Flags: + (++) CAN_FLAG_RQCP0. + (++) CAN_FLAG_RQCP1. + (++) CAN_FLAG_RQCP2: Request completed MailBoxes 0, 1 and 2 Flags + Set when when the last request (transmit or abort) has + been performed. + (+) Receive Flags: + (++) CAN_FLAG_FMP0. + (++) CAN_FLAG_FMP1: FIFO 0 and 1 Message Pending Flags; + Set to signal that messages are pending in the receive FIFO. + These Flags are cleared only by hardware. + (++) CAN_FLAG_FF0. + (++) CAN_FLAG_FF1: FIFO 0 and 1 Full Flags; + Set when three messages are stored in the selected FIFO. + (++) CAN_FLAG_FOV0. + (++) CAN_FLAG_FOV1: FIFO 0 and 1 Overrun Flags; + Set when a new message has been received and passed the filter + while the FIFO was full. + (+) Operating Mode Flags: + (++) CAN_FLAG_WKU: Wake up Flag; + Set to signal that a SOF bit has been detected while the CAN + hardware was in Sleep mode. + (++) CAN_FLAG_SLAK: Sleep acknowledge Flag; + Set to signal that the CAN has entered Sleep Mode. + (+) Error Flags: + (++) CAN_FLAG_EWG: Error Warning Flag; + Set when the warning limit has been reached (Receive Error Counter + or Transmit Error Counter greater than 96). + This Flag is cleared only by hardware. + (++) CAN_FLAG_EPV: Error Passive Flag; + Set when the Error Passive limit has been reached (Receive Error + Counter or Transmit Error Counter greater than 127). + This Flag is cleared only by hardware. + (++) CAN_FLAG_BOF: Bus-Off Flag; + Set when CAN enters the bus-off state. The bus-off state is + entered on TEC overflow, greater than 255. + This Flag is cleared only by hardware. + (++) CAN_FLAG_LEC: Last error code Flag; + Set If a message has been transferred (reception or transmission) + with error, and the error code is hold. + + *** Interrupts *** + ================== + [..] The 14 interrupts can be divided on 4 groups: + (+) Transmit interrupt: + (++) CAN_IT_TME: Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt; + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when no transmit + request are pending for Tx mailboxes. + (+) Receive Interrupts: + (++) CAN_IT_FMP0. + (++) CAN_IT_FMP1: FIFO 0 and FIFO1 message pending Interrupts; + If enabled, these interrupt sources are pending when messages + are pending in the receive FIFO. + The corresponding interrupt pending bits are cleared only by hardware. + (++) CAN_IT_FF0. + (++) CAN_IT_FF1: FIFO 0 and FIFO1 full Interrupts; + If enabled, these interrupt sources are pending when three messages + are stored in the selected FIFO. + (++) CAN_IT_FOV0. + (++) CAN_IT_FOV1: FIFO 0 and FIFO1 overrun Interrupts; + If enabled, these interrupt sources are pending when a new message + has been received and passed the filter while the FIFO was full. + (+) Operating Mode Interrupts: + (++) CAN_IT_WKU: Wake-up Interrupt; + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when a SOF bit has + been detected while the CAN hardware was in Sleep mode. + (++) CAN_IT_SLK: Sleep acknowledge Interrupt: + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when the CAN has + entered Sleep Mode. + (+) Error Interrupts: + (++) CAN_IT_EWG: Error warning Interrupt; + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when the warning limit + has been reached (Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter=96). + (++) CAN_IT_EPV: Error passive Interrupt; + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when the Error Passive + limit has been reached (Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter>127). + (++) CAN_IT_BOF: Bus-off Interrupt; + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when CAN enters + the bus-off state. The bus-off state is entered on TEC overflow, + greater than 255. + This Flag is cleared only by hardware. + (++) CAN_IT_LEC: Last error code Interrupt; + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when a message has + been transferred (reception or transmission) with error and the + error code is hold. + (++) CAN_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt; + If enabled, this interrupt source is pending when an error condition + is pending. + [..] Managing the CAN controller events: + The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage + the CAN controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode. + (+) In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (++) CAN_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur. + (++) CAN_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events. + (+) In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions: + (++) CAN_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source. + (++) CAN_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs. + (++) CAN_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit + (corresponding Flag). + This function has no impact on CAN_IT_FMP0 and CAN_IT_FMP1 Interrupts + pending bits since there are cleared only by hardware. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified CANx interrupts. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param CAN_IT: specifies the CAN interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg CAN_IT_TME: Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FMP0: FIFO 0 message pending Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FF0: FIFO 0 full Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FOV0: FIFO 0 overrun Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FMP1: FIFO 1 message pending Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FF1: FIFO 1 full Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FOV1: FIFO 1 overrun Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_WKU: Wake-up Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_SLK: Sleep acknowledge Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_EWG: Error warning Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_EPV: Error passive Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_BOF: Bus-off Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_LEC: Last error code Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt + * @param NewState: new state of the CAN interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_ITConfig(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint32_t CAN_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_IT(CAN_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected CANx interrupt */ + CANx->IER |= CAN_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected CANx interrupt */ + CANx->IER &= ~CAN_IT; + } +} +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified CAN flag is set or not. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param CAN_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg CAN_FLAG_RQCP0: Request MailBox0 Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_RQCP1: Request MailBox1 Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_RQCP2: Request MailBox2 Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FMP0: FIFO 0 Message Pending Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FF0: FIFO 0 Full Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FOV0: FIFO 0 Overrun Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FMP1: FIFO 1 Message Pending Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FF1: FIFO 1 Full Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FOV1: FIFO 1 Overrun Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_WKU: Wake up Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_SLAK: Sleep acknowledge Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_EWG: Error Warning Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_EPV: Error Passive Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_BOF: Bus-Off Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_LEC: Last error code Flag + * @retval The new state of CAN_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus CAN_GetFlagStatus(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint32_t CAN_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_GET_FLAG(CAN_FLAG)); + + + if((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_ESR) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Check the status of the specified CAN flag */ + if ((CANx->ESR & (CAN_FLAG & 0x000FFFFF)) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* CAN_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + else if((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_MSR) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Check the status of the specified CAN flag */ + if ((CANx->MSR & (CAN_FLAG & 0x000FFFFF)) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* CAN_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + else if((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_TSR) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Check the status of the specified CAN flag */ + if ((CANx->TSR & (CAN_FLAG & 0x000FFFFF)) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* CAN_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + else if((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_RF0R) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Check the status of the specified CAN flag */ + if ((CANx->RF0R & (CAN_FLAG & 0x000FFFFF)) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* CAN_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + else /* If(CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_RF1R != (uint32_t)RESET) */ + { + /* Check the status of the specified CAN flag */ + if ((uint32_t)(CANx->RF1R & (CAN_FLAG & 0x000FFFFF)) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* CAN_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + } + /* Return the CAN_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the CAN's pending flags. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param CAN_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg CAN_FLAG_RQCP0: Request MailBox0 Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_RQCP1: Request MailBox1 Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_RQCP2: Request MailBox2 Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FF0: FIFO 0 Full Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FOV0: FIFO 0 Overrun Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FF1: FIFO 1 Full Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_FOV1: FIFO 1 Overrun Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_WKU: Wake up Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_SLAK: Sleep acknowledge Flag + * @arg CAN_FLAG_LEC: Last error code Flag + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_ClearFlag(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint32_t CAN_FLAG) +{ + uint32_t flagtmp=0; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_CLEAR_FLAG(CAN_FLAG)); + + if (CAN_FLAG == CAN_FLAG_LEC) /* ESR register */ + { + /* Clear the selected CAN flags */ + CANx->ESR = (uint32_t)RESET; + } + else /* MSR or TSR or RF0R or RF1R */ + { + flagtmp = CAN_FLAG & 0x000FFFFF; + + if ((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_RF0R)!=(uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Receive Flags */ + CANx->RF0R = (uint32_t)(flagtmp); + } + else if ((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_RF1R)!=(uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Receive Flags */ + CANx->RF1R = (uint32_t)(flagtmp); + } + else if ((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_TSR)!=(uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* Transmit Flags */ + CANx->TSR = (uint32_t)(flagtmp); + } + else /* If((CAN_FLAG & CAN_FLAGS_MSR)!=(uint32_t)RESET) */ + { + /* Operating mode Flags */ + CANx->MSR = (uint32_t)(flagtmp); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified CANx interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param CAN_IT: specifies the CAN interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg CAN_IT_TME: Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FMP0: FIFO 0 message pending Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FF0: FIFO 0 full Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FOV0: FIFO 0 overrun Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FMP1: FIFO 1 message pending Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FF1: FIFO 1 full Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FOV1: FIFO 1 overrun Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_WKU: Wake-up Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_SLK: Sleep acknowledge Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_EWG: Error warning Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_EPV: Error passive Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_BOF: Bus-off Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_LEC: Last error code Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt + * @retval The current state of CAN_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus CAN_GetITStatus(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint32_t CAN_IT) +{ + ITStatus itstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_IT(CAN_IT)); + + /* check the interrupt enable bit */ + if((CANx->IER & CAN_IT) != RESET) + { + /* in case the Interrupt is enabled, .... */ + switch (CAN_IT) + { + case CAN_IT_TME: + /* Check CAN_TSR_RQCPx bits */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->TSR, CAN_TSR_RQCP0|CAN_TSR_RQCP1|CAN_TSR_RQCP2); + break; + case CAN_IT_FMP0: + /* Check CAN_RF0R_FMP0 bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->RF0R, CAN_RF0R_FMP0); + break; + case CAN_IT_FF0: + /* Check CAN_RF0R_FULL0 bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->RF0R, CAN_RF0R_FULL0); + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV0: + /* Check CAN_RF0R_FOVR0 bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->RF0R, CAN_RF0R_FOVR0); + break; + case CAN_IT_FMP1: + /* Check CAN_RF1R_FMP1 bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->RF1R, CAN_RF1R_FMP1); + break; + case CAN_IT_FF1: + /* Check CAN_RF1R_FULL1 bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->RF1R, CAN_RF1R_FULL1); + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV1: + /* Check CAN_RF1R_FOVR1 bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->RF1R, CAN_RF1R_FOVR1); + break; + case CAN_IT_WKU: + /* Check CAN_MSR_WKUI bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->MSR, CAN_MSR_WKUI); + break; + case CAN_IT_SLK: + /* Check CAN_MSR_SLAKI bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->MSR, CAN_MSR_SLAKI); + break; + case CAN_IT_EWG: + /* Check CAN_ESR_EWGF bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->ESR, CAN_ESR_EWGF); + break; + case CAN_IT_EPV: + /* Check CAN_ESR_EPVF bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->ESR, CAN_ESR_EPVF); + break; + case CAN_IT_BOF: + /* Check CAN_ESR_BOFF bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->ESR, CAN_ESR_BOFF); + break; + case CAN_IT_LEC: + /* Check CAN_ESR_LEC bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->ESR, CAN_ESR_LEC); + break; + case CAN_IT_ERR: + /* Check CAN_MSR_ERRI bit */ + itstatus = CheckITStatus(CANx->MSR, CAN_MSR_ERRI); + break; + default: + /* in case of error, return RESET */ + itstatus = RESET; + break; + } + } + else + { + /* in case the Interrupt is not enabled, return RESET */ + itstatus = RESET; + } + + /* Return the CAN_IT status */ + return itstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the CANx's interrupt pending bits. + * @param CANx: where x can be 1 or 2 to to select the CAN peripheral. + * @param CAN_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg CAN_IT_TME: Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FF0: FIFO 0 full Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FOV0: FIFO 0 overrun Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FF1: FIFO 1 full Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_FOV1: FIFO 1 overrun Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_WKU: Wake-up Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_SLK: Sleep acknowledge Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_EWG: Error warning Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_EPV: Error passive Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_BOF: Bus-off Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_LEC: Last error code Interrupt + * @arg CAN_IT_ERR: Error Interrupt + * @retval None + */ +void CAN_ClearITPendingBit(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint32_t CAN_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_CAN_ALL_PERIPH(CANx)); + assert_param(IS_CAN_CLEAR_IT(CAN_IT)); + + switch (CAN_IT) + { + case CAN_IT_TME: + /* Clear CAN_TSR_RQCPx (rc_w1)*/ + CANx->TSR = CAN_TSR_RQCP0|CAN_TSR_RQCP1|CAN_TSR_RQCP2; + break; + case CAN_IT_FF0: + /* Clear CAN_RF0R_FULL0 (rc_w1)*/ + CANx->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_FULL0; + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV0: + /* Clear CAN_RF0R_FOVR0 (rc_w1)*/ + CANx->RF0R = CAN_RF0R_FOVR0; + break; + case CAN_IT_FF1: + /* Clear CAN_RF1R_FULL1 (rc_w1)*/ + CANx->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_FULL1; + break; + case CAN_IT_FOV1: + /* Clear CAN_RF1R_FOVR1 (rc_w1)*/ + CANx->RF1R = CAN_RF1R_FOVR1; + break; + case CAN_IT_WKU: + /* Clear CAN_MSR_WKUI (rc_w1)*/ + CANx->MSR = CAN_MSR_WKUI; + break; + case CAN_IT_SLK: + /* Clear CAN_MSR_SLAKI (rc_w1)*/ + CANx->MSR = CAN_MSR_SLAKI; + break; + case CAN_IT_EWG: + /* Clear CAN_MSR_ERRI (rc_w1) */ + CANx->MSR = CAN_MSR_ERRI; + /* @note the corresponding Flag is cleared by hardware depending on the CAN Bus status*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_EPV: + /* Clear CAN_MSR_ERRI (rc_w1) */ + CANx->MSR = CAN_MSR_ERRI; + /* @note the corresponding Flag is cleared by hardware depending on the CAN Bus status*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_BOF: + /* Clear CAN_MSR_ERRI (rc_w1) */ + CANx->MSR = CAN_MSR_ERRI; + /* @note the corresponding Flag is cleared by hardware depending on the CAN Bus status*/ + break; + case CAN_IT_LEC: + /* Clear LEC bits */ + CANx->ESR = RESET; + /* Clear CAN_MSR_ERRI (rc_w1) */ + CANx->MSR = CAN_MSR_ERRI; + break; + case CAN_IT_ERR: + /*Clear LEC bits */ + CANx->ESR = RESET; + /* Clear CAN_MSR_ERRI (rc_w1) */ + CANx->MSR = CAN_MSR_ERRI; + /* @note BOFF, EPVF and EWGF Flags are cleared by hardware depending on the CAN Bus status*/ + break; + default: + break; + } +} + /** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the CAN interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param CAN_Reg: specifies the CAN interrupt register to check. + * @param It_Bit: specifies the interrupt source bit to check. + * @retval The new state of the CAN Interrupt (SET or RESET). + */ +static ITStatus CheckITStatus(uint32_t CAN_Reg, uint32_t It_Bit) +{ + ITStatus pendingbitstatus = RESET; + + if ((CAN_Reg & It_Bit) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* CAN_IT is set */ + pendingbitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* CAN_IT is reset */ + pendingbitstatus = RESET; + } + return pendingbitstatus; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_dac.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_dac.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b375dfe --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_dac.c @@ -0,0 +1,681 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_dac.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) peripheral: + * + DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format + * + DMA management + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### DAC Peripheral features ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] The device integrates two 12-bit Digital Analog Converters that can + be used independently or simultaneously (dual mode): + (#) DAC channel1 with DAC_OUT1 as output + (#) DAC channel2 with DAC_OUT2 as output + [..] Digital to Analog conversion can be non-triggered using DAC_Trigger_None + and DAC_OUT1/DAC_OUT2 is available once writing to DHRx register using + DAC_SetChannel1Data()/DAC_SetChannel2Data. + [..] Digital to Analog conversion can be triggered by: + (#) External event: EXTI Line 9 (any GPIOx_Pin9) using DAC_Trigger_Ext_IT9. + The used pin (GPIOx_Pin9) must be configured in input mode. + (#) Timers TRGO: TIM2, TIM8/TIM3, TIM4, TIM6, TIM7, and TIM15 + (DAC_Trigger_T2_TRGO, DAC_Trigger_T4_TRGO...) + The timer TRGO event should be selected using TIM_SelectOutputTrigger() + (++) To trigger DAC conversions by TIM3 instead of TIM8 follow + this sequence: + (+++) Enable SYSCFG APB clock by calling + RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE); + (+++) Select DAC_Trigger_T3_TRGO when calling DAC_Init() + (+++) Remap the DAC trigger from TIM8 to TIM3 by calling + SYSCFG_TriggerRemapConfig(SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_DACTIM3, ENABLE) + (#) Software using DAC_Trigger_Software + [..] Each DAC channel integrates an output buffer that can be used to + reduce the output impedance, and to drive external loads directly + without having to add an external operational amplifier. + To enable, the output buffer use + DAC_InitStructure.DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable; + [..] Refer to the device datasheet for more details about output impedance + value with and without output buffer. + [..] Both DAC channels can be used to generate: + (+) Noise wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Noise + (+) Triangle wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Triangle + [..] Wave generation can be disabled using DAC_WaveGeneration_None + [..] The DAC data format can be: + (+) 8-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_8b_R + (+) 12-bit left alignment using DAC_Align_12b_L + (+) 12-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_12b_R + [..] The analog output voltage on each DAC channel pin is determined + by the following equation: + (+) DAC_OUTx = VREF+ * DOR / 4095 with DOR is the Data Output Register. + VREF+ is the input voltage reference (refer to the device datasheet) + e.g. To set DAC_OUT1 to 0.7V, use DAC_SetChannel1Data(DAC_Align_12b_R, 868); + Assuming that VREF+ = 3.3, DAC_OUT1 = (3.3 * 868) / 4095 = 0.7V + [..] A DMA request can be generated when an external trigger (but not + a software trigger) occurs if DMA2 requests are enabled using + DAC_DMACmd(); + DMA requests are mapped as following: + (+) DAC channel1 is mapped on DMA2 channel3 which must be already + configured. + (+) DAC channel2 is mapped on DMA2 channel4 which must be already + configured. + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (+) DAC APB clock must be enabled to get write access to DAC + registers using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE); + (+) Configure DAC_OUTx (DAC_OUT1: PA4, DAC_OUT2: PA5) in analog mode. + (+) Configure the DAC channel using DAC_Init(); + (+) Enable the DAC channel using DAC_Cmd(); + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_dac.h" +#include "stm32f30x_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC + * @brief DAC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* CR register Mask */ +#define CR_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00000FFE) + +/* DAC Dual Channels SWTRIG masks */ +#define DUAL_SWTRIG_SET ((uint32_t)0x00000003) +#define DUAL_SWTRIG_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC) + +/* DHR registers offsets */ +#define DHR12R1_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000008) +#define DHR12R2_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000014) +#define DHR12RD_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000020) + +/* DOR register offset */ +#define DOR_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x0000002C) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Group1 DAC channels configuration + * @brief DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the DAC peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Enable DAC reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE); + /* Release DAC from reset state */ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the DAC peripheral according to the specified parameters + * in the DAC_InitStruct. + * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the specified DAC channel. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_Init(uint32_t DAC_Channel, DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0; + + /* Check the DAC parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_TRIGGER(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_GENERATE_WAVE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_LFSR_UNMASK_TRIANGLE_AMPLITUDE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_OUTPUT_BUFFER_STATE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer)); + +/*---------------------------- DAC CR Configuration --------------------------*/ + /* Get the DAC CR value */ + tmpreg1 = DAC->CR; + /* Clear BOFFx, TENx, TSELx, WAVEx and MAMPx bits */ + tmpreg1 &= ~(CR_CLEAR_MASK << DAC_Channel); + /* Configure for the selected DAC channel: buffer output, trigger, + wave generation, mask/amplitude for wave generation */ + /* Set TSELx and TENx bits according to DAC_Trigger value */ + /* Set WAVEx bits according to DAC_WaveGeneration value */ + /* Set MAMPx bits according to DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude value */ + /* Set BOFFx bit according to DAC_OutputBuffer value */ + tmpreg2 = (DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration | + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude | \ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer); + /* Calculate CR register value depending on DAC_Channel */ + tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << DAC_Channel; + /* Write to DAC CR */ + DAC->CR = tmpreg1; +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each DAC_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_StructInit(DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct) +{ +/*--------------- Reset DAC init structure parameters values -----------------*/ + /* Initialize the DAC_Trigger member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger = DAC_Trigger_None; + /* Initialize the DAC_WaveGeneration member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration = DAC_WaveGeneration_None; + /* Initialize the DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude = DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bit0; + /* Initialize the DAC_OutputBuffer member */ + DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC channel. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param NewState: new state of the DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note When the DAC channel is enabled the trigger source can no more be modified. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_Cmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR |= (DAC_CR_EN1 << DAC_Channel); + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR &= (~(DAC_CR_EN1 << DAC_Channel)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected DAC channel software trigger. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel software trigger. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->SWTRIGR |= (uint32_t)DAC_SWTRIGR_SWTRIG1 << (DAC_Channel >> 4); + } + else + { + /* Disable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->SWTRIGR &= ~((uint32_t)DAC_SWTRIGR_SWTRIG1 << (DAC_Channel >> 4)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables simultaneously the two DAC channels software triggers. + * @param NewState: new state of the DAC channels software triggers. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable software trigger for both DAC channels */ + DAC->SWTRIGR |= DUAL_SWTRIG_SET; + } + else + { + /* Disable software trigger for both DAC channels */ + DAC->SWTRIGR &= DUAL_SWTRIG_RESET; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected DAC channel wave generation. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_Wave: specifies the wave type to enable or disable. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Wave_Noise: noise wave generation + * @arg DAC_Wave_Triangle: triangle wave generation + * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel wave generation. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_WaveGenerationCmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_Wave, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_WAVE(DAC_Wave)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR |= DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */ + DAC->CR &= ~(DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the specified data holding register value for DAC channel1. + * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel1. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected + * @param Data: Data to be loaded in the selected data holding register. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SetChannel1Data(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE; + tmp += DHR12R1_OFFSET + DAC_Align; + + /* Set the DAC channel1 selected data holding register */ + *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp = Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the specified data holding register value for DAC channel2. + * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel2. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected + * @param Data: Data to be loaded in the selected data holding register. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SetChannel2Data(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data)); + + tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE; + tmp += DHR12R2_OFFSET + DAC_Align; + + /* Set the DAC channel2 selected data holding register */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = Data; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the specified data holding register value for dual channel DAC. + * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for dual channel DAC. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected + * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected + * @param Data2: Data for DAC Channel2 to be loaded in the selected data holding register. + * @param Data1: Data for DAC Channel1 to be loaded in the selected data holding register. + * @note In dual mode, a unique register access is required to write in both + * DAC channels at the same time. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_SetDualChannelData(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data2, uint16_t Data1) +{ + uint32_t data = 0, tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data1)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data2)); + + /* Calculate and set dual DAC data holding register value */ + if (DAC_Align == DAC_Align_8b_R) + { + data = ((uint32_t)Data2 << 8) | Data1; + } + else + { + data = ((uint32_t)Data2 << 16) | Data1; + } + + tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE; + tmp += DHR12RD_OFFSET + DAC_Align; + + /* Set the dual DAC selected data holding register */ + *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = data; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the last data output value of the selected DAC channel. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @retval The selected DAC channel data output value. + */ +uint16_t DAC_GetDataOutputValue(uint32_t DAC_Channel) +{ + __IO uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + + tmp = (uint32_t) DAC_BASE ; + tmp += DOR_OFFSET + ((uint32_t)DAC_Channel >> 2); + + /* Returns the DAC channel data output register value */ + return (uint16_t) (*(__IO uint32_t*) tmp); +} +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Group2 DMA management functions + * @brief DMA management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### DMA management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC channel DMA request. + * @note When enabled DMA1 is generated when an external trigger (EXTI Line9, + * TIM2, TIM4, TIM5, TIM6, TIM7 or TIM8 but not a software trigger) occurs. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel DMA request. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note The DAC channel1 is mapped on DMA1 channel3 which must be + * already configured. + * @note The DAC channel2 is mapped on DMA1 channel4 which must be + * already configured. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_DMACmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC channel DMA request */ + DAC->CR |= (DAC_CR_DMAEN1 << DAC_Channel); + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC channel DMA request */ + DAC->CR &= (~(DAC_CR_DMAEN1 << DAC_Channel)); + } +} +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup DAC_Group3 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC interrupts. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be the following values: + * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask + * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before the + * acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request). + * @param NewState: new state of the specified DAC interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_ITConfig(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected DAC interrupts */ + DAC->CR |= (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel); + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected DAC interrupts */ + DAC->CR &= (~(uint32_t)(DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified DAC flag is set or not. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be only of the following value: + * @arg DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR: DMA underrun flag + * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before the + * acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request). + * @retval The new state of DAC_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus DAC_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_FLAG(DAC_FLAG)); + + /* Check the status of the specified DAC flag */ + if ((DAC->SR & (DAC_FLAG << DAC_Channel)) != (uint8_t)RESET) + { + /* DAC_FLAG is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* DAC_FLAG is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the DAC_FLAG status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the DAC channel's pending flags. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be of the following value: + * @arg DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR: DMA underrun flag + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_ClearFlag(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_FLAG(DAC_FLAG)); + + /* Clear the selected DAC flags */ + DAC->SR = (DAC_FLAG << DAC_Channel); +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified DAC interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be the following values: + * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask + * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before the + * acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request). + * @retval The new state of DAC_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus DAC_GetITStatus(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + uint32_t enablestatus = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT)); + + /* Get the DAC_IT enable bit status */ + enablestatus = (DAC->CR & (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)) ; + + /* Check the status of the specified DAC interrupt */ + if (((DAC->SR & (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)) != (uint32_t)RESET) && enablestatus) + { + /* DAC_IT is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* DAC_IT is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the DAC_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the DAC channel's interrupt pending bits. + * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected + * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected + * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be the following values: + * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask + * @retval None + */ +void DAC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel)); + assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT)); + + /* Clear the selected DAC interrupt pending bits */ + DAC->SR = (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_gpio.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_gpio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4132b95 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_gpio.c @@ -0,0 +1,530 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_gpio.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the GPIO peripheral: + * + Initialization and Configuration functions + * + GPIO Read and Write functions + * + GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions + * + * @verbatim + + + =============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (#) Enable the GPIO AHB clock using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() + (#) Configure the GPIO pin(s) using GPIO_Init() + Four possible configuration are available for each pin: + (++) Input: Floating, Pull-up, Pull-down. + (++) Output: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull), + Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull). + In output mode, the speed is configurable: Low, Medium, Fast or High. + (++) Alternate Function: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull), + Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull). + (++) Analog: required mode when a pin is to be used as ADC channel, + DAC output or comparator input. + (#) Peripherals alternate function: + (++) For ADC, DAC and comparators, configure the desired pin in + analog mode using GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AN + (++) For other peripherals (TIM, USART...): + (+++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate + Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function. + (+++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function mode using + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF + (+++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via + GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members. + (+++) Call GPIO_Init() function. + (#) To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use GPIO_ReadInputDataBit() + (#) To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use + GPIO_SetBits()/GPIO_ResetBits() + (#) During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not active + and the GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode (except JTAG pins). + (#) The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as + general-purpose (PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE + oscillator is off. The LSE has priority over the GPIO function. + (#) The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as general-purpose + (PF0 and PF1 respectively) when the HSE oscillator is off. The HSE has + the priority over the GPIO function. + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_gpio.h" +#include "stm32f30x_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO + * @brief GPIO driver modules + * @{ + */ + + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Group1 Initialization and Configuration + * @brief Initialization and Configuration + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Initialization and Configuration ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset + * values. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + if(GPIOx == GPIOA) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOB) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOC) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOD) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD, DISABLE); + } + else if(GPIOx == GPIOE) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE, DISABLE); + } + else + { + if(GPIOx == GPIOF) + { + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF, ENABLE); + RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF, DISABLE); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the GPIO_InitStruct. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that + * contains the configuration information for the specified GPIO + * peripheral. + * @note GPIO_Pin: selects the pin to be configured: + * GPIO_Pin_0->GPIO_Pin_15 for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD and GPIOE; + * GPIO_Pin_0->GPIO_Pin_2, GPIO_Pin_4, GPIO_Pin_6, GPIO_Pin_9 + * and GPIO_Pin_10 for GPIOF. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t pinpos = 0x00, pos = 0x00 , currentpin = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PUPD(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd)); + + /*-------------------------- Configure the port pins -----------------------*/ + /*-- GPIO Mode Configuration --*/ + for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x10; pinpos++) + { + pos = ((uint32_t)0x01) << pinpos; + + /* Get the port pins position */ + currentpin = (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin) & pos; + + if (currentpin == pos) + { + if ((GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_OUT) || (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_AF)) + { + /* Check Speed mode parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed)); + + /* Speed mode configuration */ + GPIOx->OSPEEDR &= ~(GPIO_OSPEEDER_OSPEEDR0 << (pinpos * 2)); + GPIOx->OSPEEDR |= ((uint32_t)(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed) << (pinpos * 2)); + + /* Check Output mode parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_OTYPE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType)); + + /* Output mode configuration */ + GPIOx->OTYPER &= ~((GPIO_OTYPER_OT_0) << ((uint16_t)pinpos)); + GPIOx->OTYPER |= (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType) << ((uint16_t)pinpos)); + } + + GPIOx->MODER &= ~(GPIO_MODER_MODER0 << (pinpos * 2)); + + GPIOx->MODER |= (((uint32_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode) << (pinpos * 2)); + + /* Pull-up Pull down resistor configuration */ + GPIOx->PUPDR &= ~(GPIO_PUPDR_PUPDR0 << ((uint16_t)pinpos * 2)); + GPIOx->PUPDR |= (((uint32_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd) << (pinpos * 2)); + } + } +} + +/** + * @brief Fills each GPIO_InitStruct member with its default value. + * @param GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure which will + * be initialized. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_StructInit(GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct) +{ + /* Reset GPIO init structure parameters values */ + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin = GPIO_Pin_All; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_IN; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed = GPIO_Speed_2MHz; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType = GPIO_OType_PP; + GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd = GPIO_PuPd_NOPULL; +} + +/** + * @brief Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers. + * The locked registers are GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR, + * GPIOx_PUPDR, GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH. + * @note The configuration of the locked GPIO pins can no longer be modified + * until the next reset. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A or B or D) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written. + * This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15). + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_PinLockConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0x00010000; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_LIST_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + tmp |= GPIO_Pin; + /* Set LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = tmp; + /* Reset LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = GPIO_Pin; + /* Set LCKK bit */ + GPIOx->LCKR = tmp; + /* Read LCKK bit */ + tmp = GPIOx->LCKR; + /* Read LCKK bit */ + tmp = GPIOx->LCKR; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Group2 GPIO Read and Write + * @brief GPIO Read and Write + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### GPIO Read and Write ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified input port pin. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read. + * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : + * (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; + * (0..2, 4, 6, 9..10) for GPIOF. + * @retval The input port pin value. + */ +uint8_t GPIO_ReadInputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + uint8_t bitstatus = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + if ((GPIOx->IDR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET) + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified input port pin. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @retval The input port pin value. + */ +uint16_t GPIO_ReadInputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + return ((uint16_t)GPIOx->IDR); +} + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified output data port bit. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: Specifies the port bit to read. + * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : + * (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; + * (0..2, 4, 6, 9..10) for GPIOF. + * @retval The output port pin value. + */ +uint8_t GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + uint8_t bitstatus = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + if ((GPIOx->ODR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET) + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_RESET; + } + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Reads the specified GPIO output data port. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @retval GPIO output data port value. + */ +uint16_t GPIO_ReadOutputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + return ((uint16_t)GPIOx->ODR); +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the selected data port bits. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written. + * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : + * (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; + * (0..2, 4, 6, 9..10) for GPIOF. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_SetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the selected data port bits. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written. + * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : + * (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; + * (0..2, 4, 6, 9..10) for GPIOF. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_ResetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + + GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets or clears the selected data port bit. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written. + * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be : + * (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD or GPIOE; + * (0..2, 4, 6, 9..10) for GPIOF. + * @param BitVal: specifies the value to be written to the selected bit. + * This parameter can be one of the BitAction enumeration values: + * @arg Bit_RESET: to clear the port pin + * @arg Bit_SET: to set the port pin + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_WriteBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin, BitAction BitVal) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_BIT_ACTION(BitVal)); + + if (BitVal != Bit_RESET) + { + GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin; + } + else + { + GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin ; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Writes data to the specified GPIO data port. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param PortVal: specifies the value to be written to the port output data + * register. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_Write(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t PortVal) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + + GPIOx->ODR = PortVal; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup GPIO_Group3 GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions + * @brief GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Writes data to the specified GPIO data port. + * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral. + * @param GPIO_PinSource: specifies the pin for the Alternate function. + * This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15). + * @param GPIO_AF: selects the pin to be used as Alternate function. + * This parameter can be one of the following value: + * @arg GPIO_AF_0: JTCK-SWCLK, JTDI, JTDO/TRACESW0, JTMS-SWDAT, MCO, NJTRST, + * TRACED, TRACECK. + * @arg GPIO_AF_1: OUT, TIM2, TIM15, TIM16, TIM17. + * @arg GPIO_AF_2: COMP1_OUT, TIM1, TIM2, TIM3, TIM4, TIM8, TIM15. + * @arg GPIO_AF_3: COMP7_OUT, TIM8, TIM15, Touch. + * @arg GPIO_AF_4: I2C1, I2C2, TIM1, TIM8, TIM16, TIM17. + * @arg GPIO_AF_5: IR_OUT, I2S2, I2S3, SPI1, SPI2, TIM8, USART4, USART5 + * @arg GPIO_AF_6: IR_OUT, I2S2, I2S3, SPI2, SPI3, TIM1, TIM8 + * @arg GPIO_AF_7: AOP2_OUT, CAN, COMP3_OUT, COMP5_OUT, COMP6_OUT, USART1, + * USART2, USART3. + * @arg GPIO_AF_8: COMP1_OUT, COMP2_OUT, COMP3_OUT, COMP4_OUT, COMP5_OUT, + * COMP6_OUT. + * @arg GPIO_AF_9: AOP4_OUT, CAN, TIM1, TIM8, TIM15. + * @arg GPIO_AF_10: AOP1_OUT, AOP3_OUT, TIM2, TIM3, TIM4, TIM8, TIM17. + * @arg GPIO_AF_11: TIM1, TIM8. + * @arg GPIO_AF_12: TIM1. + * @arg GPIO_AF_14: USBDM, USBDP. + * @arg GPIO_AF_15: OUT. + * @note The pin should already been configured in Alternate Function mode(AF) + * using GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF + * @note Refer to the Alternate function mapping table in the device datasheet + * for the detailed mapping of the system and peripherals alternate + * function I/O pins. + * @retval None + */ +void GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_PinSource, uint8_t GPIO_AF) +{ + uint32_t temp = 0x00; + uint32_t temp_2 = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_SOURCE(GPIO_PinSource)); + assert_param(IS_GPIO_AF(GPIO_AF)); + + temp = ((uint32_t)(GPIO_AF) << ((uint32_t)((uint32_t)GPIO_PinSource & (uint32_t)0x07) * 4)); + GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] &= ~((uint32_t)0xF << ((uint32_t)((uint32_t)GPIO_PinSource & (uint32_t)0x07) * 4)); + temp_2 = GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] | temp; + GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] = temp_2; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_iwdg.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_iwdg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..19a8b0c --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_iwdg.c @@ -0,0 +1,288 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_iwdg.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Independent watchdog (IWDG) peripheral: + * + Prescaler and Counter configuration + * + IWDG activation + * + Flag management + * + @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### IWDG features ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] The IWDG can be started by either software or hardware (configurable + through option byte). + [..] The IWDG is clocked by its own dedicated low-speed clock (LSI) and + thus stays active even if the main clock fails. + Once the IWDG is started, the LSI is forced ON and cannot be disabled + (LSI cannot be disabled too), and the counter starts counting down from + the reset value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000) + a system reset is generated. + The IWDG counter should be reloaded at regular intervals to prevent + an MCU reset. + [..] The IWDG is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional + in STOP and STANDBY mode (IWDG reset can wake-up from STANDBY). + [..] IWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a IWDG + reset occurs. + [..] Min-max timeout value @41KHz (LSI): ~0.1ms / ~25.5s + The IWDG timeout may vary due to LSI frequency dispersion. STM32F30x + devices provide the capability to measure the LSI frequency (LSI clock + connected internally to TIM16 CH1 input capture). The measured value + can be used to have an IWDG timeout with an acceptable accuracy. + For more information, please refer to the STM32F30x Reference manual. + + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This driver allows to use IWDG peripheral with either window option enabled + or disabled. To do so follow one of the two procedures below. + (#) Window option is enabled: + (++) Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used + in software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled + by hardware). + (++) Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using + IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function. + (++) Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function. + (++) Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function. + This value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter + is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value. + (++) Wait for the IWDG registers to be updated using IWDG_GetFlagStatus() function. + (++) Configure the IWDG refresh window using IWDG_SetWindowValue() function. + + (#) Window option is disabled: + (++) Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using + IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function. + (++) Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function. + (++) Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function. + This value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter + is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value. + (++) Wait for the IWDG registers to be updated using IWDG_GetFlagStatus() function. + (++) reload the IWDG counter at regular intervals during normal operation + to prevent an MCU reset, using IWDG_ReloadCounter() function. + (++) Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used + in software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled + by hardware). + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_iwdg.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG + * @brief IWDG driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ---------------------- IWDG registers bit mask ----------------------------*/ +/* KR register bit mask */ +#define KR_KEY_RELOAD ((uint16_t)0xAAAA) +#define KR_KEY_ENABLE ((uint16_t)0xCCCC) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Group1 Prescaler and Counter configuration functions + * @brief Prescaler and Counter configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Prescaler and Counter configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers. + * @param IWDG_WriteAccess: new state of write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable: Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers + * @arg IWDG_WriteAccess_Disable: Disable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(uint16_t IWDG_WriteAccess) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_WRITE_ACCESS(IWDG_WriteAccess)); + IWDG->KR = IWDG_WriteAccess; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets IWDG Prescaler value. + * @param IWDG_Prescaler: specifies the IWDG Prescaler value. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_4: IWDG prescaler set to 4 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_8: IWDG prescaler set to 8 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_16: IWDG prescaler set to 16 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_32: IWDG prescaler set to 32 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_64: IWDG prescaler set to 64 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_128: IWDG prescaler set to 128 + * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_256: IWDG prescaler set to 256 + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_SetPrescaler(uint8_t IWDG_Prescaler) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_PRESCALER(IWDG_Prescaler)); + IWDG->PR = IWDG_Prescaler; +} + +/** + * @brief Sets IWDG Reload value. + * @param Reload: specifies the IWDG Reload value. + * This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x0FFF. + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_SetReload(uint16_t Reload) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_RELOAD(Reload)); + IWDG->RLR = Reload; +} + +/** + * @brief Reloads IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register + * (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled). + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_ReloadCounter(void) +{ + IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_RELOAD; +} + + +/** + * @brief Sets the IWDG window value. + * @param WindowValue: specifies the window value to be compared to the downcounter. + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_SetWindowValue(uint16_t WindowValue) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_WINDOW_VALUE(WindowValue)); + IWDG->WINR = WindowValue; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Group2 IWDG activation function + * @brief IWDG activation function + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### IWDG activation function ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables IWDG (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled). + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void IWDG_Enable(void) +{ + IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_ENABLE; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup IWDG_Group3 Flag management function + * @brief Flag management function + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Flag management function ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified IWDG flag is set or not. + * @param IWDG_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg IWDG_FLAG_PVU: Prescaler Value Update on going + * @arg IWDG_FLAG_RVU: Reload Value Update on going + * @arg IWDG_FLAG_WVU: Counter Window Value Update on going + * @retval The new state of IWDG_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t IWDG_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_IWDG_FLAG(IWDG_FLAG)); + if ((IWDG->SR & IWDG_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_misc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_misc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e58264 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_misc.c @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_misc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides all the miscellaneous firmware functions (add-on + * to CMSIS functions). + * + @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### How to configure Interrupts using driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the NVIC interrupts + (IRQ). The Cortex-M4 exceptions are managed by CMSIS functions. + (#) Configure the NVIC Priority Grouping using NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig() + function according to the following table. + The table below gives the allowed values of the pre-emption priority + and subpriority according to the Priority Grouping configuration + performed by NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig function. + + (#) Enable and Configure the priority of the selected IRQ Channels. + [..] + (@) When the NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, it will no any nested interrupt, + the IRQ priority will be managed only by subpriority. + The sub-priority is only used to sort pending exception priorities, + and does not affect active exceptions. + (@) Lower priority values gives higher priority. + (@) Priority Order: + (#@) Lowest Preemption priority. + (#@) Lowest Subpriority. + (#@) Lowest hardware priority (IRQn position). + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_misc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup MISC + * @brief MISC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK ((uint32_t)0x05FA0000) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup MISC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the priority grouping: pre-emption priority and subpriority. + * @param NVIC_PriorityGroup: specifies the priority grouping bits length. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_0: 0 bits for pre-emption priority. + * 4 bits for subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_1: 1 bits for pre-emption priority. + * 3 bits for subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_2: 2 bits for pre-emption priority. + * 2 bits for subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_3: 3 bits for pre-emption priority. + * 1 bits for subpriority. + * @arg NVIC_PriorityGroup_4: 4 bits for pre-emption priority. + * 0 bits for subpriority. + * @note When NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, it will no be any nested + * interrupt. This interrupts priority is managed only with subpriority. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig(uint32_t NVIC_PriorityGroup) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(NVIC_PriorityGroup)); + + /* Set the PRIGROUP[10:8] bits according to NVIC_PriorityGroup value */ + SCB->AIRCR = AIRCR_VECTKEY_MASK | NVIC_PriorityGroup; +} + +/** + * @brief Initializes the NVIC peripheral according to the specified + * parameters in the NVIC_InitStruct. + * @note To configure interrupts priority correctly, the NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig() + * function should be called before. + * @param NVIC_InitStruct: pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure that contains + * the configuration information for the specified NVIC peripheral. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_Init(NVIC_InitTypeDef* NVIC_InitStruct) +{ + uint32_t tmppriority = 0x00, tmppre = 0x00, tmpsub = 0x0F; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority)); + + if (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd != DISABLE) + { + /* Compute the Corresponding IRQ Priority --------------------------------*/ + tmppriority = (0x700 - ((SCB->AIRCR) & (uint32_t)0x700))>> 0x08; + tmppre = (0x4 - tmppriority); + tmpsub = tmpsub >> tmppriority; + + tmppriority = (uint32_t)NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority << tmppre; + tmppriority |= NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority & tmpsub; + tmppriority = tmppriority << 0x04; + + NVIC->IP[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel] = tmppriority; + + /* Enable the Selected IRQ Channels --------------------------------------*/ + NVIC->ISER[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05] = + (uint32_t)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (uint8_t)0x1F); + } + else + { + /* Disable the Selected IRQ Channels -------------------------------------*/ + NVIC->ICER[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x05] = + (uint32_t)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (uint8_t)0x1F); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Sets the vector table location and Offset. + * @param NVIC_VectTab: specifies if the vector table is in RAM or FLASH memory. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg NVIC_VectTab_RAM + * @arg NVIC_VectTab_FLASH + * @param Offset: Vector Table base offset field. This value must be a multiple of 0x200. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_SetVectorTable(uint32_t NVIC_VectTab, uint32_t Offset) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_VECTTAB(NVIC_VectTab)); + assert_param(IS_NVIC_OFFSET(Offset)); + + SCB->VTOR = NVIC_VectTab | (Offset & (uint32_t)0x1FFFFF80); +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the condition for the system to enter low power mode. + * @param LowPowerMode: Specifies the new mode for the system to enter low power mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg NVIC_LP_SEVONPEND + * @arg NVIC_LP_SLEEPDEEP + * @arg NVIC_LP_SLEEPONEXIT + * @param NewState: new state of LP condition. This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void NVIC_SystemLPConfig(uint8_t LowPowerMode, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_NVIC_LP(LowPowerMode)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + SCB->SCR |= LowPowerMode; + } + else + { + SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)(~(uint32_t)LowPowerMode); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the SysTick clock source. + * @param SysTick_CLKSource: specifies the SysTick clock source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8: AHB clock divided by 8 selected as SysTick clock source. + * @arg SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK: AHB clock selected as SysTick clock source. + * @retval None + */ +void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig(uint32_t SysTick_CLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_CLK_SOURCE(SysTick_CLKSource)); + if (SysTick_CLKSource == SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK) + { + SysTick->CTRL |= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK; + } + else + { + SysTick->CTRL &= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_pwr.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_pwr.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a0e26a --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_pwr.c @@ -0,0 +1,538 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_pwr.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Power Controller (PWR) peripheral: + * + Backup Domain Access + * + PVD configuration + * + WakeUp pins configuration + * + Low Power modes configuration + * + Flags management + * + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_pwr.h" +#include "stm32f30x_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR + * @brief PWR driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* --------- PWR registers bit address in the alias region ---------- */ +#define PWR_OFFSET (PWR_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of DBP bit */ +#define CR_OFFSET (PWR_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define DBP_BitNumber 0x08 +#define CR_DBP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (DBP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of PVDE bit */ +#define PVDE_BitNumber 0x04 +#define CR_PVDE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (PVDE_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* ------------------ PWR registers bit mask ------------------------ */ + +/* CR register bit mask */ +#define CR_DS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC) +#define CR_PLS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF1F) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group1 Backup Domain Access function + * @brief Backup Domain Access function + * +@verbatim + ============================================================================== + ##### Backup Domain Access function ##### + ============================================================================== + + [..] After reset, the Backup Domain Registers (RCC BDCR Register, RTC registers + and RTC backup registers) are protected against possible stray write accesses. + [..] To enable access to Backup domain use the PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_DeInit(void) +{ + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, ENABLE); + RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, DISABLE); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables access to the RTC and backup registers. + * @note If the HSE divided by 32 is used as the RTC clock, the + * Backup Domain Access should be kept enabled. + * @param NewState: new state of the access to the RTC and backup registers. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_BackupAccessCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_DBP_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group2 PVD configuration functions + * @brief PVD configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### PVD configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + [..] + (+) The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a threshold + selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR). + (+) A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower than the + PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI line16 + and can generate an interrupt if enabled through the EXTI registers. + (+) The PVD is stopped in Standby mode. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector(PVD). + * @param PWR_PVDLevel: specifies the PVD detection level + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_0: PVD detection level set to 2.18V + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_1: PVD detection level set to 2.28V + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_2: PVD detection level set to 2.38V + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_3: PVD detection level set to 2.48V + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_4: PVD detection level set to 2.58V + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_5: PVD detection level set to 2.68V + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_6: PVD detection level set to 2.78V + * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_7: PVD detection level set to 2.88V + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_PVDLevelConfig(uint32_t PWR_PVDLevel) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_LEVEL(PWR_PVDLevel)); + + tmpreg = PWR->CR; + + /* Clear PLS[7:5] bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_PLS_MASK; + + /* Set PLS[7:5] bits according to PWR_PVDLevel value */ + tmpreg |= PWR_PVDLevel; + + /* Store the new value */ + PWR->CR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD). + * @param NewState: new state of the PVD. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_PVDCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PVDE_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group3 WakeUp pins configuration functions + * @brief WakeUp pins configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### WakeUp pins configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] + (+) WakeUp pins are used to wakeup the system from Standby mode. These pins are + forced in input pull down configuration and are active on rising edges. + (+) There are three WakeUp pins: WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00, WakeUp Pin 2 on PC.13 and + WakeUp Pin 3 on PE.06. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the WakeUp Pin functionality. + * @param PWR_WakeUpPin: specifies the WakeUpPin. + * This parameter can be: PWR_WakeUpPin_1, PWR_WakeUpPin_2 or PWR_WakeUpPin_3. + * @param NewState: new state of the WakeUp Pin functionality. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_WakeUpPinCmd(uint32_t PWR_WakeUpPin, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_WAKEUP_PIN(PWR_WakeUpPin)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the EWUPx pin */ + PWR->CSR |= PWR_WakeUpPin; + } + else + { + /* Disable the EWUPx pin */ + PWR->CSR &= ~PWR_WakeUpPin; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group4 Low Power modes configuration functions + * @brief Low Power modes configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Low Power modes configuration functions ##### + ============================================================================== + + [..] The devices feature three low-power modes: + (+) Sleep mode: Cortex-M4 core stopped, peripherals kept running. + (+) Stop mode: all clocks are stopped, regulator running, regulator in low power mode + (+) Standby mode: VCORE domain powered off + + *** Sleep mode *** + ================== + [..] + (+) Entry: + (++) The Sleep mode is entered by executing the WFE() or WFI() instructions. + (+) Exit: + (++) Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt + controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode. + + *** Stop mode *** + ================= + [..] In Stop mode, all clocks in the VCORE domain are stopped, the PLL, the HSI, + and the HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register + contents are preserved. + The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode. + + (+) Entry: + (++) The Stop mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_Regulator_LowPower,) + function with regulator in LowPower or with Regulator ON. + (+) Exit: + (++) Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Interrupt/Event mode + or any internal IPs (I2C or UASRT) wakeup event. + + *** Standby mode *** + ==================== + [..] The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based + on the Cortex-M4 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled. + The VCORE domain is consequently powered off. The PLL, the HSI, and the HSE + oscillator are also switched off. SRAM and register + contents are lost except for the Backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup + registers and Standby circuitry). + + [..] The voltage regulator is OFF. + + (+) Entry: + (++) The Standby mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function. + (+) Exit: + (++) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup, + tamper event, time-stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset. + + *** Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode *** + ============================================= + [..] The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, a tamper + event, a time-stamp event, or a comparator event, without depending on an + external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode). + + (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode + (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt + or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function + (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm() + and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions. + (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it + is necessary to: + (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 19 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt + or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() + function. + (+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the + RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() + functions. + + (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Standby mode + (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function. + (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm() + and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions. + (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it + is necessary to: + (+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() + function. + (+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the + RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() + functions. + + (+) Comparator auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode + (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with a comparator wakeup event, it is necessary to: + (+++) Configure the correspondant comparator EXTI Line to be sensitive to + the selected edges (falling, rising or falling and rising) + (Interrupt or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function. + (+++) Configure the comparator to generate the event. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enters Sleep mode. + * @note In Sleep mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode. + * @param PWR_SLEEPEntry: specifies if SLEEP mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction + * @arg PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_EnterSleepMode(uint8_t PWR_SLEEPEntry) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_SLEEP_ENTRY(PWR_SLEEPEntry)); + + /* Clear SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk); + + /* Select SLEEP mode entry -------------------------------------------------*/ + if(PWR_SLEEPEntry == PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI) + { + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); + } + else + { + /* Request Wait For Event */ + __WFE(); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enters STOP mode. + * @note In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode. + * @note When exiting Stop mode by issuing an interrupt or a wakeup event, + * the HSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock. + * @note When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an additional + * startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode. + * By keeping the internal regulator ON during Stop mode, the consumption + * is higher although the startup time is reduced. + * @param PWR_Regulator: specifies the regulator state in STOP mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_Regulator_ON: STOP mode with regulator ON + * @arg PWR_Regulator_LowPower: STOP mode with regulator in low power mode + * @param PWR_STOPEntry: specifies if STOP mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_STOPEntry_WFI: enter STOP mode with WFI instruction + * @arg PWR_STOPEntry_WFE: enter STOP mode with WFE instruction + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_EnterSTOPMode(uint32_t PWR_Regulator, uint8_t PWR_STOPEntry) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(PWR_Regulator)); + assert_param(IS_PWR_STOP_ENTRY(PWR_STOPEntry)); + + /* Select the regulator state in STOP mode ---------------------------------*/ + tmpreg = PWR->CR; + /* Clear PDDS and LPDSR bits */ + tmpreg &= CR_DS_MASK; + + /* Set LPDSR bit according to PWR_Regulator value */ + tmpreg |= PWR_Regulator; + + /* Store the new value */ + PWR->CR = tmpreg; + + /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR |= SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk; + + /* Select STOP mode entry --------------------------------------------------*/ + if(PWR_STOPEntry == PWR_STOPEntry_WFI) + { + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); + } + else + { + /* Request Wait For Event */ + __WFE(); + } + /* Reset SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk); +} + +/** + * @brief Enters STANDBY mode. + * @note In Standby mode, all I/O pins are high impedance except for: + * @note Reset pad (still available) + * @note RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) if configured for Wakeup pin 2 (WKUP2), tamper, + * time-stamp, RTC Alarm out, or RTC clock calibration out. + * @note WKUP pin 1 (PA0) and WKUP pin 3 (PE6), if enabled. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void) +{ + /* Clear Wakeup flag */ + PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_CWUF; + + /* Select STANDBY mode */ + PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_PDDS; + + /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */ + SCB->SCR |= SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk; + +/* This option is used to ensure that store operations are completed */ +#if defined ( __CC_ARM ) + __force_stores(); +#endif + /* Request Wait For Interrupt */ + __WFI(); +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup PWR_Group5 Flags management functions + * @brief Flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified PWR flag is set or not. + * @param PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag. This flag indicates that a wakeup event + * was received from the WKUP pin or from the RTC alarm (Alarm A or Alarm B), + * RTC Tamper event, RTC TimeStamp event or RTC Wakeup. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag. This flag indicates that the system was + * resumed from StandBy mode. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_PVDO: PVD Output. This flag is valid only if PVD is enabled + * by the PWR_PVDCmd() function. + * @arg PWR_FLAG_VREFINTRDY: Internal Voltage Reference Ready flag. This + * flag indicates the state of the internal voltage reference, VREFINT. + * @retval The new state of PWR_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus PWR_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t PWR_FLAG) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_GET_FLAG(PWR_FLAG)); + + if ((PWR->CSR & PWR_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the PWR's pending flags. + * @param PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag + * @arg PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag + * @retval None + */ +void PWR_ClearFlag(uint32_t PWR_FLAG) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_PWR_CLEAR_FLAG(PWR_FLAG)); + + PWR->CR |= PWR_FLAG << 2; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_rcc.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_rcc.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57821e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_rcc.c @@ -0,0 +1,1771 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_rcc.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the Reset and clock control (RCC) peripheral: + * + Internal/external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration + * + System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration + * + Peripheral clocks configuration + * + Interrupts and flags management + * + @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### RCC specific features ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] After reset the device is running from HSI (8 MHz) with Flash 0 WS, + all peripherals are off except internal SRAM, Flash and SWD. + (+) There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) busses; + all peripherals mapped on these busses are running at HSI speed. + (+) The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except the SRAM and FLASH. + (+) All GPIOs are in input floating state, except the SWD pins which + are assigned to be used for debug purpose. + [..] Once the device starts from reset, the user application has to: + (+) Configure the clock source to be used to drive the System clock + (if the application needs higher frequency/performance). + (+) Configure the System clock frequency and Flash settings. + (+) Configure the AHB and APB busses prescalers. + (+) Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used. + (+) Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals which clocks are not + derived from the System clock (ADC, TIM, I2C, USART, RTC and IWDG). + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_rcc.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup RCC + * @brief RCC driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* ------------ RCC registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */ +#define RCC_OFFSET (RCC_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of HSION bit */ +#define CR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define HSION_BitNumber 0x00 +#define CR_HSION_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (HSION_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of PLLON bit */ +#define PLLON_BitNumber 0x18 +#define CR_PLLON_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (PLLON_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of CSSON bit */ +#define CSSON_BitNumber 0x13 +#define CR_CSSON_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CR_OFFSET * 32) + (CSSON_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CFGR Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of USBPRE bit */ +#define CFGR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x04) +#define USBPRE_BitNumber 0x16 +#define CFGR_USBPRE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFGR_OFFSET * 32) + (USBPRE_BitNumber * 4)) +/* Alias word address of I2SSRC bit */ +#define I2SSRC_BitNumber 0x17 +#define CFGR_I2SSRC_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFGR_OFFSET * 32) + (I2SSRC_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- BDCR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of RTCEN bit */ +#define BDCR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x20) +#define RTCEN_BitNumber 0x0F +#define BDCR_RTCEN_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (BDCR_OFFSET * 32) + (RTCEN_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Alias word address of BDRST bit */ +#define BDRST_BitNumber 0x10 +#define BDCR_BDRST_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (BDCR_OFFSET * 32) + (BDRST_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CSR Register ---*/ + +/* Alias word address of LSION bit */ +#define CSR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x24) +#define LSION_BitNumber 0x00 +#define CSR_LSION_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (LSION_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* ---------------------- RCC registers bit mask ------------------------ */ +/* RCC Flag Mask */ +#define FLAG_MASK ((uint8_t)0x1F) + +/* CFGR register byte 3 (Bits[31:23]) base address */ +#define CFGR_BYTE3_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40021007) + +/* CIR register byte 2 (Bits[15:8]) base address */ +#define CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40021009) + +/* CIR register byte 3 (Bits[23:16]) base address */ +#define CIR_BYTE3_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x4002100A) + +/* CR register byte 2 (Bits[23:16]) base address */ +#define CR_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40021002) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +static __I uint8_t APBAHBPrescTable[16] = {0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9}; +static __I uint16_t ADCPrescTable[13] = {0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256}; + +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup RCC_Group1 Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions + * @brief Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Internal-external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the internal/external + clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO. + (#) HSI (high-speed internal), 8 MHz factory-trimmed RC used directly + or through the PLL as System clock source. + The HSI clock can be used also to clock the USART and I2C peripherals. + (#) LSI (low-speed internal), 40 KHz low consumption RC used as IWDG and/or RTC + clock source. + (#) HSE (high-speed external), 4 to 32 MHz crystal oscillator used directly or + through the PLL as System clock source. Can be used also as RTC clock source. + (#) LSE (low-speed external), 32 KHz oscillator used as RTC clock source. + LSE can be used also to clock the USART peripherals. + (#) PLL (clocked by HSI or HSE), for System clock. + (#) CSS (Clock security system), once enabled and if a HSE clock failure occurs + (HSE used directly or through PLL as System clock source), the System clock + is automatically switched to HSI and an interrupt is generated if enabled. + The interrupt is linked to the Cortex-M4 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) + exception vector. + (#) MCO (microcontroller clock output), used to output SYSCLK, HSI, HSE, LSI, LSE, + PLL clock on PA8 pin. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Resets the RCC clock configuration to the default reset state. + * @note The default reset state of the clock configuration is given below: + * @note HSI ON and used as system clock source + * @note HSE and PLL OFF + * @note AHB, APB1 and APB2 prescalers set to 1. + * @note CSS and MCO OFF + * @note All interrupts disabled + * @note However, this function doesn't modify the configuration of the + * @note Peripheral clocks + * @note LSI, LSE and RTC clocks + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Set HSION bit */ + RCC->CR |= (uint32_t)0x00000001; + + /* Reset SW[1:0], HPRE[3:0], PPRE[2:0] and MCOSEL[2:0] bits */ + RCC->CFGR &= (uint32_t)0xF8FFC000; + + /* Reset HSEON, CSSON and PLLON bits */ + RCC->CR &= (uint32_t)0xFEF6FFFF; + + /* Reset HSEBYP bit */ + RCC->CR &= (uint32_t)0xFFFBFFFF; + + /* Reset PLLSRC, PLLXTPRE, PLLMUL and USBPRE bits */ + RCC->CFGR &= (uint32_t)0xFF80FFFF; + + /* Reset PREDIV1[3:0] and ADCPRE[13:4] bits */ + RCC->CFGR2 &= (uint32_t)0xFFFFC000; + + /* Reset USARTSW[1:0], I2CSW and TIMSW bits */ + RCC->CFGR3 &= (uint32_t)0xF00FCCC; + + /* Disable all interrupts */ + RCC->CIR = 0x00000000; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the External High Speed oscillator (HSE). + * @note After enabling the HSE (RCC_HSE_ON or RCC_HSE_Bypass), the application + * software should wait on HSERDY flag to be set indicating that HSE clock + * is stable and can be used to clock the PLL and/or system clock. + * @note HSE state can not be changed if it is used directly or through the + * PLL as system clock. In this case, you have to select another source + * of the system clock then change the HSE state (ex. disable it). + * @note The HSE is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes. + * @note This function resets the CSSON bit, so if the Clock security system(CSS) + * was previously enabled you have to enable it again after calling this + * function. + * @param RCC_HSE: specifies the new state of the HSE. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_HSE_OFF: turn OFF the HSE oscillator, HSERDY flag goes low after + * 6 HSE oscillator clock cycles. + * @arg RCC_HSE_ON: turn ON the HSE oscillator + * @arg RCC_HSE_Bypass: HSE oscillator bypassed with external clock + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_HSEConfig(uint8_t RCC_HSE) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE(RCC_HSE)); + + /* Reset HSEON and HSEBYP bits before configuring the HSE ------------------*/ + *(__IO uint8_t *) CR_BYTE2_ADDRESS = RCC_HSE_OFF; + + /* Set the new HSE configuration -------------------------------------------*/ + *(__IO uint8_t *) CR_BYTE2_ADDRESS = RCC_HSE; + +} + +/** + * @brief Waits for HSE start-up. + * @note This function waits on HSERDY flag to be set and return SUCCESS if + * this flag is set, otherwise returns ERROR if the timeout is reached + * and this flag is not set. The timeout value is defined by the constant + * HSE_STARTUP_TIMEOUT in stm32f30x.h file. You can tailor it depending + * on the HSE crystal used in your application. + * @param None + * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value: + * - SUCCESS: HSE oscillator is stable and ready to use + * - ERROR: HSE oscillator not yet ready + */ +ErrorStatus RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp(void) +{ + __IO uint32_t StartUpCounter = 0; + ErrorStatus status = ERROR; + FlagStatus HSEStatus = RESET; + + /* Wait till HSE is ready and if timeout is reached exit */ + do + { + HSEStatus = RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY); + StartUpCounter++; + } while((StartUpCounter != HSE_STARTUP_TIMEOUT) && (HSEStatus == RESET)); + + if (RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != RESET) + { + status = SUCCESS; + } + else + { + status = ERROR; + } + return (status); +} + +/** + * @brief Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration value. + * @note The calibration is used to compensate for the variations in voltage + * and temperature that influence the frequency of the internal HSI RC. + * Refer to the Application Note AN3300 for more details on how to + * calibrate the HSI. + * @param HSICalibrationValue: specifies the HSI calibration trimming value. + * This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x1F. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue(uint8_t HSICalibrationValue) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_HSI_CALIBRATION_VALUE(HSICalibrationValue)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CR; + + /* Clear HSITRIM[4:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= ~RCC_CR_HSITRIM; + + /* Set the HSITRIM[4:0] bits according to HSICalibrationValue value */ + tmpreg |= (uint32_t)HSICalibrationValue << 3; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI). + * @note After enabling the HSI, the application software should wait on + * HSIRDY flag to be set indicating that HSI clock is stable and can + * be used to clock the PLL and/or system clock. + * @note HSI can not be stopped if it is used directly or through the PLL + * as system clock. In this case, you have to select another source + * of the system clock then stop the HSI. + * @note The HSI is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes. + * @note When the HSI is stopped, HSIRDY flag goes low after 6 HSI oscillator + * clock cycles. + * @param NewState: new state of the HSI. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_HSICmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_HSION_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE). + * @note As the LSE is in the Backup domain and write access is denied to this + * domain after reset, you have to enable write access using + * PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function before to configure the LSE + * (to be done once after reset). + * @note After enabling the LSE (RCC_LSE_ON or RCC_LSE_Bypass), the application + * software should wait on LSERDY flag to be set indicating that LSE clock + * is stable and can be used to clock the RTC. + * @param RCC_LSE: specifies the new state of the LSE. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_LSE_OFF: turn OFF the LSE oscillator, LSERDY flag goes low after + * 6 LSE oscillator clock cycles. + * @arg RCC_LSE_ON: turn ON the LSE oscillator + * @arg RCC_LSE_Bypass: LSE oscillator bypassed with external clock + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_LSEConfig(uint32_t RCC_LSE) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE(RCC_LSE)); + + /* Reset LSEON and LSEBYP bits before configuring the LSE ------------------*/ + /* Reset LSEON bit */ + RCC->BDCR &= ~(RCC_BDCR_LSEON); + + /* Reset LSEBYP bit */ + RCC->BDCR &= ~(RCC_BDCR_LSEBYP); + + /* Configure LSE */ + RCC->BDCR |= RCC_LSE; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE) drive capability. + * @param RCC_LSEDrive: specifies the new state of the LSE drive capability. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_Low: LSE oscillator low drive capability. + * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_MediumLow: LSE oscillator medium low drive capability. + * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_MediumHigh: LSE oscillator medium high drive capability. + * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_High: LSE oscillator high drive capability. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_LSEDriveConfig(uint32_t RCC_LSEDrive) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE_DRIVE(RCC_LSEDrive)); + + /* Clear LSEDRV[1:0] bits */ + RCC->BDCR &= ~(RCC_BDCR_LSEDRV); + + /* Set the LSE Drive */ + RCC->BDCR |= RCC_LSEDrive; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI). + * @note After enabling the LSI, the application software should wait on + * LSIRDY flag to be set indicating that LSI clock is stable and can + * be used to clock the IWDG and/or the RTC. + * @note LSI can not be disabled if the IWDG is running. + * @note When the LSI is stopped, LSIRDY flag goes low after 6 LSI oscillator + * clock cycles. + * @param NewState: new state of the LSI. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_LSICmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_LSION_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the PLL clock source and multiplication factor. + * @note This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled. + * @note The minimum input clock frequency for PLL is 2 MHz (when using HSE as + * PLL source). + * @param RCC_PLLSource: specifies the PLL entry clock source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_PLLSource_HSI_Div2: HSI oscillator clock divided by 2 selected as + * PLL clock entry + * @arg RCC_PLLSource_PREDIV1: PREDIV1 clock selected as PLL clock source + * @param RCC_PLLMul: specifies the PLL multiplication factor, which drive the PLLVCO clock + * This parameter can be RCC_PLLMul_x where x:[2,16] + * + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_PLLConfig(uint32_t RCC_PLLSource, uint32_t RCC_PLLMul) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_SOURCE(RCC_PLLSource)); + assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_MUL(RCC_PLLMul)); + + /* Clear PLL Source [16] and Multiplier [21:18] bits */ + RCC->CFGR &= ~(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL | RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC); + + /* Set the PLL Source and Multiplier */ + RCC->CFGR |= (uint32_t)(RCC_PLLSource | RCC_PLLMul); +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the PLL. + * @note After enabling the PLL, the application software should wait on + * PLLRDY flag to be set indicating that PLL clock is stable and can + * be used as system clock source. + * @note The PLL can not be disabled if it is used as system clock source + * @note The PLL is disabled by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes. + * @param NewState: new state of the PLL. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PLLON_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the PREDIV1 division factor. + * @note This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled. + * @param RCC_PREDIV1_Div: specifies the PREDIV1 clock division factor. + * This parameter can be RCC_PREDIV1_Divx where x:[1,16] + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_PREDIV1Config(uint32_t RCC_PREDIV1_Div) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_PREDIV1(RCC_PREDIV1_Div)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR2; + /* Clear PREDIV1[3:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= ~(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1); + + /* Set the PREDIV1 division factor */ + tmpreg |= RCC_PREDIV1_Div; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR2 = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Clock Security System. + * @note If a failure is detected on the HSE oscillator clock, this oscillator + * is automatically disabled and an interrupt is generated to inform the + * software about the failure (Clock Security System Interrupt, CSSI), + * allowing the MCU to perform rescue operations. The CSSI is linked to + * the Cortex-M4 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector. + * @param NewState: new state of the Clock Security System. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_CSSON_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin (PA8). + * @note PA8 should be configured in alternate function mode. + * @note The MCOF flag is set once the MCO clock source switch is effective. + * @param RCC_MCOSource: specifies the clock source to output. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_MCOSource_NoClock: No clock selected. + * @arg RCC_MCOSource_LSI: LSI oscillator clock selected. + * @arg RCC_MCOSource_LSE: LSE oscillator clock selected. + * @arg RCC_MCOSource_SYSCLK: System clock selected. + * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSI: HSI oscillator clock selected. + * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSE: HSE oscillator clock selected. + * @arg RCC_MCOSource_PLLCLK_Div2: PLL clock selected. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_MCOConfig(uint8_t RCC_MCOSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO_SOURCE(RCC_MCOSource)); + + /* Select MCO clock source and prescaler */ + *(__IO uint8_t *) CFGR_BYTE3_ADDRESS = RCC_MCOSource; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RCC_Group2 System AHB, APB1 and APB2 busses clocks configuration functions + * @brief System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### System, AHB, APB1 and APB2 busses clocks configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the System, AHB, APB1 and + APB2 busses clocks. + (#) Several clock sources can be used to drive the System clock (SYSCLK): HSI, + HSE and PLL. + The AHB clock (HCLK) is derived from System clock through configurable prescaler + and used to clock the CPU, memory and peripherals mapped on AHB bus (DMA and GPIO). + APB1 (PCLK1) and APB2 (PCLK2) clocks are derived from AHB clock through + configurable prescalers and used to clock the peripherals mapped on these busses. + You can use "RCC_GetClocksFreq()" function to retrieve the frequencies of these clocks. + + (#) The maximum frequency of the SYSCLK, HCLK, PCLK1 and PCLK2 is 72 MHz. + Depending on the maximum frequency, the FLASH wait states (WS) should be + adapted accordingly: + +---------------------------------+ + | Wait states | HCLK clock | + | (Latency) | frequency (MHz) | + |-------------- |-----------------| + |0WS(1CPU cycle)| 0 < HCLK <= 24 | + |---------------|-----------------| + |1WS(2CPU cycle)|24 < HCLK <=48 | + |---------------|-----------------| + |2WS(3CPU cycle)|48 < HCLK <= 72 | + +---------------------------------+ + + (#) After reset, the System clock source is the HSI (8 MHz) with 0 WS and + prefetch is disabled. + [..] + (@) All the peripheral clocks are derived from the System clock (SYSCLK) + except: + (+@) The FLASH program/erase clock which is always HSI 8MHz clock. + (+@) The USB 48 MHz clock which is derived from the PLL VCO clock. + (+@) The USART clock which can be derived as well from HSI 8MHz, LSI or LSE. + (+@) The I2C clock which can be derived as well from HSI 8MHz clock. + (+@) The ADC clock which is derived from PLL output. + (+@) The RTC clock which is derived from the LSE, LSI or 1 MHz HSE_RTC + (HSE divided by a programmable prescaler). The System clock (SYSCLK) + frequency must be higher or equal to the RTC clock frequency. + (+@) IWDG clock which is always the LSI clock. + [..] It is recommended to use the following software sequences to tune the number + of wait states needed to access the Flash memory with the CPU frequency (HCLK). + (+) Increasing the CPU frequency + (++) Program the Flash Prefetch buffer, using "FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(ENABLE)" + function + (++) Check that Flash Prefetch buffer activation is taken into account by + reading FLASH_ACR using the FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus() function + (++) Program Flash WS to 1 or 2, using "FLASH_SetLatency()" function + (++) Check that the new number of WS is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR + (++) Modify the CPU clock source, using "RCC_SYSCLKConfig()" function + (++) If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by using "RCC_HCLKConfig()" function + (++) Check that the new CPU clock source is taken into account by reading + the clock source status, using "RCC_GetSYSCLKSource()" function + (+) Decreasing the CPU frequency + (++) Modify the CPU clock source, using "RCC_SYSCLKConfig()" function + (++) If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by using "RCC_HCLKConfig()" function + (++) Check that the new CPU clock source is taken into account by reading + the clock source status, using "RCC_GetSYSCLKSource()" function + (++) Program the new number of WS, using "FLASH_SetLatency()" function + (++) Check that the new number of WS is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR + (++) Disable the Flash Prefetch buffer using "FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(DISABLE)" + function + (++) Check that Flash Prefetch buffer deactivation is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR + using the FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus() function. + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the system clock (SYSCLK). + * @note The HSI is used (enabled by hardware) as system clock source after + * startup from Reset, wake-up from STOP and STANDBY mode, or in case + * of failure of the HSE used directly or indirectly as system clock + * (if the Clock Security System CSS is enabled). + * @note A switch from one clock source to another occurs only if the target + * clock source is ready (clock stable after startup delay or PLL locked). + * If a clock source which is not yet ready is selected, the switch will + * occur when the clock source will be ready. + * You can use RCC_GetSYSCLKSource() function to know which clock is + * currently used as system clock source. + * @param RCC_SYSCLKSource: specifies the clock source used as system clock source + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSI: HSI selected as system clock source + * @arg RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSE: HSE selected as system clock source + * @arg RCC_SYSCLKSource_PLLCLK: PLL selected as system clock source + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_SYSCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLKSource) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_SYSCLK_SOURCE(RCC_SYSCLKSource)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear SW[1:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= ~RCC_CFGR_SW; + + /* Set SW[1:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLKSource value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLKSource; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the clock source used as system clock. + * @param None + * @retval The clock source used as system clock. The returned value can be one + * of the following values: + * - 0x00: HSI used as system clock + * - 0x04: HSE used as system clock + * - 0x08: PLL used as system clock + */ +uint8_t RCC_GetSYSCLKSource(void) +{ + return ((uint8_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_SWS)); +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the AHB clock (HCLK). + * @note Depending on the device voltage range, the software has to set correctly + * these bits to ensure that the system frequency does not exceed the + * maximum allowed frequency (for more details refer to section above + * "CPU, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions"). + * @param RCC_SYSCLK: defines the AHB clock divider. This clock is derived from + * the system clock (SYSCLK). + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div1: AHB clock = SYSCLK + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div2: AHB clock = SYSCLK/2 + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div4: AHB clock = SYSCLK/4 + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div8: AHB clock = SYSCLK/8 + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div16: AHB clock = SYSCLK/16 + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div64: AHB clock = SYSCLK/64 + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div128: AHB clock = SYSCLK/128 + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div256: AHB clock = SYSCLK/256 + * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div512: AHB clock = SYSCLK/512 + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_HCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLK) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_HCLK(RCC_SYSCLK)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + + /* Clear HPRE[3:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= ~RCC_CFGR_HPRE; + + /* Set HPRE[3:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLK value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLK; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the Low Speed APB clock (PCLK1). + * @param RCC_HCLK: defines the APB1 clock divider. This clock is derived from + * the AHB clock (HCLK). + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div1: APB1 clock = HCLK + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div2: APB1 clock = HCLK/2 + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div4: APB1 clock = HCLK/4 + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div8: APB1 clock = HCLK/8 + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div16: APB1 clock = HCLK/16 + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_PCLK1Config(uint32_t RCC_HCLK) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_HCLK)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + /* Clear PPRE1[2:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= ~RCC_CFGR_PPRE1; + + /* Set PPRE1[2:0] bits according to RCC_HCLK value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_HCLK; + + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the High Speed APB clock (PCLK2). + * @param RCC_HCLK: defines the APB2 clock divider. This clock is derived from + * the AHB clock (HCLK). + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div1: APB2 clock = HCLK + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div2: APB2 clock = HCLK/2 + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div4: APB2 clock = HCLK/4 + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div8: APB2 clock = HCLK/8 + * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div16: APB2 clock = HCLK/16 + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_PCLK2Config(uint32_t RCC_HCLK) +{ + uint32_t tmpreg = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_HCLK)); + + tmpreg = RCC->CFGR; + /* Clear PPRE2[2:0] bits */ + tmpreg &= ~RCC_CFGR_PPRE2; + /* Set PPRE2[2:0] bits according to RCC_HCLK value */ + tmpreg |= RCC_HCLK << 3; + /* Store the new value */ + RCC->CFGR = tmpreg; +} + +/** + * @brief Returns the frequencies of the System, AHB, APB2 and APB1 busses clocks. + * + * @note This function returns the frequencies of : + * System, AHB, APB2 and APB1 busses clocks, ADC1/2/3/4 clocks, + * USART1/2/3/4/5 clocks, I2C1/2 clocks and TIM1/8 Clocks. + * + * @note The frequency returned by this function is not the real frequency + * in the chip. It is calculated based on the predefined constant and + * the source selected by RCC_SYSCLKConfig(). + * + * @note If SYSCLK source is HSI, function returns constant HSI_VALUE(*) + * + * @note If SYSCLK source is HSE, function returns constant HSE_VALUE(**) + * + * @note If SYSCLK source is PLL, function returns constant HSE_VALUE(**) + * or HSI_VALUE(*) multiplied by the PLL factors. + * + * @note (*) HSI_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f30x.h file (default value + * 8 MHz) but the real value may vary depending on the variations + * in voltage and temperature, refer to RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue(). + * + * @note (**) HSE_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f30x.h file (default value + * 8 MHz), user has to ensure that HSE_VALUE is same as the real + * frequency of the crystal used. Otherwise, this function may + * return wrong result. + * + * @note The result of this function could be not correct when using fractional + * value for HSE crystal. + * + * @param RCC_Clocks: pointer to a RCC_ClocksTypeDef structure which will hold + * the clocks frequencies. + * + * @note This function can be used by the user application to compute the + * baudrate for the communication peripherals or configure other parameters. + * @note Each time SYSCLK, HCLK, PCLK1 and/or PCLK2 clock changes, this function + * must be called to update the structure's field. Otherwise, any + * configuration based on this function will be incorrect. + * + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_GetClocksFreq(RCC_ClocksTypeDef* RCC_Clocks) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0, pllmull = 0, pllsource = 0, prediv1factor = 0, presc = 0, pllclk = 0; + uint32_t apb2presc = 0, ahbpresc = 0; + + /* Get SYSCLK source -------------------------------------------------------*/ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_SWS; + + switch (tmp) + { + case 0x00: /* HSI used as system clock */ + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + break; + case 0x04: /* HSE used as system clock */ + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSE_VALUE; + break; + case 0x08: /* PLL used as system clock */ + /* Get PLL clock source and multiplication factor ----------------------*/ + pllmull = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL; + pllsource = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC; + pllmull = ( pllmull >> 18) + 2; + + if (pllsource == 0x00) + { + /* HSI oscillator clock divided by 2 selected as PLL clock entry */ + pllclk = (HSI_VALUE >> 1) * pllmull; + } + else + { + prediv1factor = (RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1) + 1; + /* HSE oscillator clock selected as PREDIV1 clock entry */ + pllclk = (HSE_VALUE / prediv1factor) * pllmull; + } + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = pllclk; + break; + default: /* HSI used as system clock */ + RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + break; + } + /* Compute HCLK, PCLK clocks frequencies -----------------------------------*/ + /* Get HCLK prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_HPRE; + tmp = tmp >> 4; + ahbpresc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp]; + /* HCLK clock frequency */ + RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency >> ahbpresc; + + /* Get PCLK1 prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE1; + tmp = tmp >> 8; + presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp]; + /* PCLK1 clock frequency */ + RCC_Clocks->PCLK1_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency >> presc; + + /* Get PCLK2 prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE2; + tmp = tmp >> 11; + apb2presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp]; + /* PCLK2 clock frequency */ + RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency >> apb2presc; + + /* Get ADC12CLK prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_ADCPRE12; + tmp = tmp >> 4; + presc = ADCPrescTable[tmp]; + if ((presc & 0x10) != 0) + { + /* ADC12CLK clock frequency is derived from PLL clock */ + RCC_Clocks->ADC12CLK_Frequency = pllclk / presc; + } + else + { + /* ADC12CLK clock frequency is AHB clock */ + RCC_Clocks->ADC12CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + + /* Get ADC34CLK prescaler */ + tmp = RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_ADCPRE34; + tmp = tmp >> 9; + presc = ADCPrescTable[tmp]; + if ((presc & 0x10) != 0) + { + /* ADC34CLK clock frequency is derived from PLL clock */ + RCC_Clocks->ADC34CLK_Frequency = pllclk / presc; + } + else + { + /* ADC34CLK clock frequency is AHB clock */ + RCC_Clocks->ADC34CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + + /* I2C1CLK clock frequency */ + if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_I2C1SW) != RCC_CFGR3_I2C1SW) + { + /* I2C1 Clock is HSI Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->I2C1CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + } + else + { + /* I2C1 Clock is System Clock */ + RCC_Clocks->I2C1CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + + /* I2C2CLK clock frequency */ + if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_I2C2SW) != RCC_CFGR3_I2C2SW) + { + /* I2C2 Clock is HSI Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->I2C2CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + } + else + { + /* I2C2 Clock is System Clock */ + RCC_Clocks->I2C2CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + + /* TIM1CLK clock frequency */ + if(((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_TIM1SW) == RCC_CFGR3_TIM1SW)&& (RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency == pllclk) \ + && (apb2presc == ahbpresc)) + { + /* TIM1 Clock is 2 * pllclk */ + RCC_Clocks->TIM1CLK_Frequency = pllclk * 2; + } + else + { + /* TIM1 Clock is APB2 clock. */ + RCC_Clocks->TIM1CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency; + } + + /* TIM8CLK clock frequency */ + if(((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_TIM8SW) == RCC_CFGR3_TIM8SW)&& (RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency == pllclk) \ + && (apb2presc == ahbpresc)) + { + /* TIM8 Clock is 2 * pllclk */ + RCC_Clocks->TIM8CLK_Frequency = pllclk * 2; + } + else + { + /* TIM8 Clock is APB2 clock. */ + RCC_Clocks->TIM8CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency; + } + + /* USART1CLK clock frequency */ + if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == 0x0) + { + /* USART Clock is PCLK */ + RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK2_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW_0) + { + /* USART Clock is System Clock */ + RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW_1) + { + /* USART Clock is LSE Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) + { + /* USART Clock is HSI Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + } + + /* USART2CLK clock frequency */ + if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == 0x0) + { + /* USART Clock is PCLK */ + RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK1_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW_0) + { + /* USART Clock is System Clock */ + RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW_1) + { + /* USART Clock is LSE Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) + { + /* USART Clock is HSI Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + } + + /* USART3CLK clock frequency */ + if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == 0x0) + { + /* USART Clock is PCLK */ + RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK1_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW_0) + { + /* USART Clock is System Clock */ + RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW_1) + { + /* USART Clock is LSE Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) + { + /* USART Clock is HSI Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + } + + /* UART4CLK clock frequency */ + if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW) == 0x0) + { + /* USART Clock is PCLK */ + RCC_Clocks->UART4CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK1_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW) == RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW_0) + { + /* USART Clock is System Clock */ + RCC_Clocks->UART4CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW) == RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW_1) + { + /* USART Clock is LSE Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->UART4CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW) == RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW) + { + /* USART Clock is HSI Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->UART4CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + } + + /* UART5CLK clock frequency */ + if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW) == 0x0) + { + /* USART Clock is PCLK */ + RCC_Clocks->UART5CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK1_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW) == RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW_0) + { + /* USART Clock is System Clock */ + RCC_Clocks->UART5CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW) == RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW_1) + { + /* USART Clock is LSE Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->UART5CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE; + } + else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW) == RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW) + { + /* USART Clock is HSI Osc. */ + RCC_Clocks->UART5CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RCC_Group3 Peripheral clocks configuration functions + * @brief Peripheral clocks configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Peripheral clocks configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the Peripheral clocks. + (#) The RTC clock which is derived from the LSE, LSI or HSE_Div32 + (HSE divided by 32). + (#) After restart from Reset or wakeup from STANDBY, all peripherals are + off except internal SRAM, Flash and SWD. Before to start using + a peripheral you have to enable its interface clock. You can do this + using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd() + and RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() functions. + (#) To reset the peripherals configuration (to the default state after + device reset) you can use RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd() + and RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd() functions. +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Configures the ADC clock (ADCCLK). + * @param RCC_PLLCLK: defines the ADC clock divider. This clock is derived from + * the PLL Clock. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_OFF: ADC12 clock disabled + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div1: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/1 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div2: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/2 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div4: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/4 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div6: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/6 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div8: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/8 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div10: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/10 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div12: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/12 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div16: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/16 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div32: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/32 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div64: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/64 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div128: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/128 + * @arg RCC_ADC12PLLCLK_Div256: ADC12 clock = PLLCLK/256 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_OFF: ADC34 clock disabled + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div1: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/1 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div2: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/2 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div4: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/4 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div6: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/6 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div8: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/8 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div10: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/10 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div12: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/12 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div16: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/16 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div32: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/32 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div64: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/64 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div128: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/128 + * @arg RCC_ADC34PLLCLK_Div256: ADC34 clock = PLLCLK/256 + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_ADCCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_PLLCLK) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_ADCCLK(RCC_PLLCLK)); + + tmp = (RCC_PLLCLK >> 28); + + /* Clears ADCPRE34 bits */ + if (tmp != 0) + { + RCC->CFGR2 &= ~RCC_CFGR2_ADCPRE34; + } + /* Clears ADCPRE12 bits */ + else + { + RCC->CFGR2 &= ~RCC_CFGR2_ADCPRE12; + } + /* Set ADCPRE bits according to RCC_PLLCLK value */ + RCC->CFGR2 |= RCC_PLLCLK; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the I2C clock (I2CCLK). + * @param RCC_I2CCLK: defines the I2C clock source. This clock is derived + * from the HSI or System clock. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_I2CxCLK_HSI: I2Cx clock = HSI + * @arg RCC_I2CxCLK_SYSCLK: I2Cx clock = System Clock + * (x can be 1 or 2). + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_I2CCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_I2CCLK) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_I2CCLK(RCC_I2CCLK)); + + tmp = (RCC_I2CCLK >> 28); + + /* Clear I2CSW bit */ + if (tmp != 0) + { + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_I2C2SW; + } + else + { + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_I2C1SW; + } + /* Set I2CSW bits according to RCC_I2CCLK value */ + RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_I2CCLK; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the TIM1 and TIM8 clock sources(TIMCLK). + * @note The configuration of the TIMx clock source is only possible when the + * SYSCLK = PLL and HCLK and PCLK2 clocks are not divided in respect to SYSCLK + * @note If one of the previous conditions is missed, the TIM clock source + * configuration is lost and calling again this function becomes mandatory. + * @param RCC_TIMCLK: defines the TIMx clock source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_TIMxCLK_HCLK: TIMx clock = APB high speed clock (doubled frequency + * when prescaled) + * @arg RCC_TIMxCLK_PLLCLK: TIMx clock = PLL output (running up to 144 MHz) + * (x can be 1 or 8). + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_TIMCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_TIMCLK) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_TIMCLK(RCC_TIMCLK)); + + tmp = (RCC_TIMCLK >> 28); + + /* Clear I2CSW bit */ + if (tmp != 0) + { + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_TIM8SW; + } + else + { + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_TIM1SW; + } + /* Set I2CSW bits according to RCC_TIMCLK value */ + RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_TIMCLK; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the USART clock (USARTCLK). + * @param RCC_USARTCLK: defines the USART clock source. This clock is derived + * from the HSI or System clock. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_USARTxCLK_PCLK: USART clock = APB Clock (PCLK) + * @arg RCC_USARTxCLK_SYSCLK: USART clock = System Clock + * @arg RCC_USARTxCLK_LSE: USART clock = LSE Clock + * @arg RCC_USARTxCLK_HSI: USART clock = HSI Clock + * (x can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_USARTCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_USARTCLK) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_USARTCLK(RCC_USARTCLK)); + + tmp = (RCC_USARTCLK >> 28); + + /* Clear USARTSW[1:0] bit */ + switch (tmp) + { + case 0x01: /* clear USART1SW */ + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW; + break; + case 0x02: /* clear USART2SW */ + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW; + break; + case 0x03: /* clear USART3SW */ + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW; + break; + case 0x04: /* clear UART4SW */ + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_UART4SW; + break; + case 0x05: /* clear UART5SW */ + RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_UART5SW; + break; + default: + break; + } + + /* Set USARTSW bits according to RCC_USARTCLK value */ + RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_USARTCLK; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the USB clock (USBCLK). + * @param RCC_USBCLKSource: specifies the USB clock source. This clock is + * derived from the PLL output. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_1Div5: PLL clock divided by 1,5 selected as USB + * clock source + * @arg RCC_USBCLKSource_PLLCLK_Div1: PLL clock selected as USB clock source + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_USBCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_USBCLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_USBCLK_SOURCE(RCC_USBCLKSource)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CFGR_USBPRE_BB = RCC_USBCLKSource; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the RTC clock (RTCCLK). + * @note As the RTC clock configuration bits are in the Backup domain and write + * access is denied to this domain after reset, you have to enable write + * access using PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function before to configure + * the RTC clock source (to be done once after reset). + * @note Once the RTC clock is configured it can't be changed unless the RTC + * is reset using RCC_BackupResetCmd function, or by a Power On Reset (POR) + * + * @param RCC_RTCCLKSource: specifies the RTC clock source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSE: LSE selected as RTC clock + * @arg RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSI: LSI selected as RTC clock + * @arg RCC_RTCCLKSource_HSE_Div32: HSE divided by 32 selected as RTC clock + * + * @note If the LSE or LSI is used as RTC clock source, the RTC continues to + * work in STOP and STANDBY modes, and can be used as wakeup source. + * However, when the HSE clock is used as RTC clock source, the RTC + * cannot be used in STOP and STANDBY modes. + * @note The maximum input clock frequency for RTC is 2MHz (when using HSE as + * RTC clock source). + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_RTCCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_RTCCLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_RTCCLK_SOURCE(RCC_RTCCLKSource)); + + /* Select the RTC clock source */ + RCC->BDCR |= RCC_RTCCLKSource; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the I2S clock source (I2SCLK). + * @note This function must be called before enabling the SPI2 and SPI3 clocks. + * @param RCC_I2SCLKSource: specifies the I2S clock source. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_I2S2CLKSource_SYSCLK: SYSCLK clock used as I2S clock source + * @arg RCC_I2S2CLKSource_Ext: External clock mapped on the I2S_CKIN pin + * used as I2S clock source + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_I2SCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_I2SCLKSource) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_I2SCLK_SOURCE(RCC_I2SCLKSource)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) CFGR_I2SSRC_BB = RCC_I2SCLKSource; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the RTC clock. + * @note This function must be used only after the RTC clock source was selected + * using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig function. + * @param NewState: new state of the RTC clock. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_RTCCLKCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) BDCR_RTCEN_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Forces or releases the Backup domain reset. + * @note This function resets the RTC peripheral (including the backup registers) + * and the RTC clock source selection in RCC_BDCR register. + * @param NewState: new state of the Backup domain reset. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_BackupResetCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + *(__IO uint32_t *) BDCR_BDRST_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the AHB peripheral clock. + * @note After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write access) + * is disabled and the application software has to enable this clock before + * using it. + * @param RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB peripheral to gates its clock. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_TS + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_CRC + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_FLITF (has effect only when the Flash memory is in power down mode) + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_SRAM + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA2 + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1 + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC34 + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC12 + * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHBPeriph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_AHB_PERIPH(RCC_AHBPeriph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->AHBENR |= RCC_AHBPeriph; + } + else + { + RCC->AHBENR &= ~RCC_AHBPeriph; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral clock. + * @note After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write access) + * is disabled and the application software has to enable this clock before + * using it. + * @param RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to gates its clock. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART1 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8 + * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB2ENR |= RCC_APB2Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB2ENR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral clock. + * @note After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write access) + * is disabled and the application software has to enable this clock before + * using it. + * @param RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to gates its clock. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART3 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART4 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART5 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USB + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_PWR + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_DAC + * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB1ENR |= RCC_APB1Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB1ENR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Forces or releases AHB peripheral reset. + * @param RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB peripheral to reset. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_TS + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC34 + * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_ADC12 + * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHBPeriph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_AHB_RST_PERIPH(RCC_AHBPeriph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->AHBRSTR |= RCC_AHBPeriph; + } + else + { + RCC->AHBRSTR &= ~RCC_AHBPeriph; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Forces or releases High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral reset. + * @param RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to reset. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART1 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1 + * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM8 + * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB2RSTR |= RCC_APB2Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB2RSTR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Forces or releases Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral reset. + * @param RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to reset. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM4 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART3 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART4 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART5 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USB + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1 + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_PWR + * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_DAC + * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + RCC->APB1RSTR |= RCC_APB1Periph; + } + else + { + RCC->APB1RSTR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph; + } +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** @defgroup RCC_Group4 Interrupts and flags management functions + * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### Interrupts and flags management functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the specified RCC interrupts. + * @note The CSS interrupt doesn't have an enable bit; once the CSS is enabled + * and if the HSE clock fails, the CSS interrupt occurs and an NMI is + * automatically generated. The NMI will be executed indefinitely, and + * since NMI has higher priority than any other IRQ (and main program) + * the application will be stacked in the NMI ISR unless the CSS interrupt + * pending bit is cleared. + * @param RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt + * @param NewState: new state of the specified RCC interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_ITConfig(uint8_t RCC_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_IT(RCC_IT)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[13:8] bits to enable the selected interrupts */ + *(__IO uint8_t *) CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS |= RCC_IT; + } + else + { + /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[13:8] bits to disable the selected interrupts */ + *(__IO uint8_t *) CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS &= (uint8_t)~RCC_IT; + } +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified RCC flag is set or not. + * @param RCC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY: HSI oscillator clock ready + * @arg RCC_FLAG_HSERDY: HSE oscillator clock ready + * @arg RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY: PLL clock ready + * @arg RCC_FLAG_MCOF: MCO Flag + * @arg RCC_FLAG_LSERDY: LSE oscillator clock ready + * @arg RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY: LSI oscillator clock ready + * @arg RCC_FLAG_OBLRST: Option Byte Loader (OBL) reset + * @arg RCC_FLAG_PINRST: Pin reset + * @arg RCC_FLAG_PORRST: POR/PDR reset + * @arg RCC_FLAG_SFTRST: Software reset + * @arg RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST: Independent Watchdog reset + * @arg RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST: Window Watchdog reset + * @arg RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST: Low Power reset + * @retval The new state of RCC_FLAG (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus RCC_GetFlagStatus(uint8_t RCC_FLAG) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0; + uint32_t statusreg = 0; + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_FLAG(RCC_FLAG)); + + /* Get the RCC register index */ + tmp = RCC_FLAG >> 5; + + if (tmp == 0) /* The flag to check is in CR register */ + { + statusreg = RCC->CR; + } + else if (tmp == 1) /* The flag to check is in BDCR register */ + { + statusreg = RCC->BDCR; + } + else if (tmp == 4) /* The flag to check is in CFGR register */ + { + statusreg = RCC->CFGR; + } + else /* The flag to check is in CSR register */ + { + statusreg = RCC->CSR; + } + + /* Get the flag position */ + tmp = RCC_FLAG & FLAG_MASK; + + if ((statusreg & ((uint32_t)1 << tmp)) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the RCC reset flags. + * The reset flags are: RCC_FLAG_OBLRST, RCC_FLAG_PINRST, RCC_FLAG_PORRST, + * RCC_FLAG_SFTRST, RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST, RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST, RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_ClearFlag(void) +{ + /* Set RMVF bit to clear the reset flags */ + RCC->CSR |= RCC_CSR_RMVF; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified RCC interrupt has occurred or not. + * @param RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt source to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt + * @retval The new state of RCC_IT (SET or RESET). + */ +ITStatus RCC_GetITStatus(uint8_t RCC_IT) +{ + ITStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_GET_IT(RCC_IT)); + + /* Check the status of the specified RCC interrupt */ + if ((RCC->CIR & RCC_IT) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the RCC_IT status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the RCC's interrupt pending bits. + * @param RCC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt + * @arg RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt + * @retval None + */ +void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RCC_IT) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_RCC_CLEAR_IT(RCC_IT)); + + /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[23:16] bits to clear the selected interrupt + pending bits */ + *(__IO uint8_t *) CIR_BYTE3_ADDRESS = RCC_IT; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ diff --git a/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_syscfg.c b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_syscfg.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e349ba6 --- /dev/null +++ b/thirdparty/STM32_USB-FS-Device_Lib_V4.0.0/Libraries/STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f30x_syscfg.c @@ -0,0 +1,472 @@ +/** + ****************************************************************************** + * @file stm32f30x_syscfg.c + * @author MCD Application Team + * @version V1.0.1 + * @date 23-October-2012 + * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following + * functionalities of the SYSCFG peripheral: + * + Remapping the memory mapped at 0x00000000 + * + Remapping the DMA channels + * + Enabling I2C fast mode plus driving capability for I2C plus + * + Remapping USB interrupt line + * + Configuring the EXTI lines connection to the GPIO port + * + Configuring the CLASSB requirements + * + @verbatim + + =============================================================================== + ##### How to use this driver ##### + =============================================================================== + [..] The SYSCFG registers can be accessed only when the SYSCFG + interface APB clock is enabled. + [..] To enable SYSCFG APB clock use: + RCC_APBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBPeriph_SYSCFG, ENABLE); + + @endverbatim + + ****************************************************************************** + * @attention + * + * <h2><center>© COPYRIGHT 2012 STMicroelectronics</center></h2> + * + * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License"); + * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. + * You may obtain a copy of the License at: + * + * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2 + * + * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software + * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, + * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. + * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and + * limitations under the License. + * + ****************************************************************************** + */ + +/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#include "stm32f30x_syscfg.h" + +/** @addtogroup STM32F30x_StdPeriph_Driver + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup SYSCFG + * @brief SYSCFG driver modules + * @{ + */ + +/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Reset value od SYSCFG_CFGR1 register */ +#define CFGR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0x7C000000) + +/* ------------ SYSCFG registers bit address in the alias region -------------*/ +#define SYSCFG_OFFSET (SYSCFG_BASE - PERIPH_BASE) + +/* --- CFGR1 Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of USB_IT_RMP bit */ +#define CFGR1_OFFSET (SYSCFG_OFFSET + 0x00) +#define USBITRMP_BitNumber 0x05 +#define CFGR1_USBITRMP_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFGR1_OFFSET * 32) + (USBITRMP_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* --- CFGR2 Register ---*/ +/* Alias word address of BYP_ADDR_PAR bit */ +#define CFGR2_OFFSET (SYSCFG_OFFSET + 0x18) +#define BYPADDRPAR_BitNumber 0x04 +#define CFGR1_BYPADDRPAR_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CFGR2_OFFSET * 32) + (BYPADDRPAR_BitNumber * 4)) + +/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/ +/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @defgroup SYSCFG_Private_Functions + * @{ + */ + +/** @defgroup SYSCFG_Group1 SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions + * @brief SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions + * +@verbatim + =============================================================================== + ##### SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions ##### + =============================================================================== + +@endverbatim + * @{ + */ + +/** + * @brief Deinitializes the SYSCFG registers to their default reset values. + * @param None + * @retval None + * @note MEM_MODE bits are not affected by APB reset. + * MEM_MODE bits took the value from the user option bytes. + */ +void SYSCFG_DeInit(void) +{ + /* Reset SYSCFG_CFGR1 register to reset value without affecting MEM_MODE bits */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= SYSCFG_CFGR1_MEM_MODE; + /* Set FPU Interrupt Enable bits to default value */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= 0x7C000000; + /* Reset RAM Write protection bits to default value */ + SYSCFG->RCR = 0x00000000; + /* Set EXTICRx registers to reset value */ + SYSCFG->EXTICR[0] = 0; + SYSCFG->EXTICR[1] = 0; + SYSCFG->EXTICR[2] = 0; + SYSCFG->EXTICR[3] = 0; + /* Set CFGR2 register to reset value */ + SYSCFG->CFGR2 = 0; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the memory mapping at address 0x00000000. + * @param SYSCFG_MemoryRemap: selects the memory remapping. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash: Main Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000 + * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemMemory: System Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000 + * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM: Embedded SRAM mapped at 0x00000000 + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_MemoryRemap) +{ + uint32_t tmpcfgr1 = 0; + + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_MEMORY_REMAP(SYSCFG_MemoryRemap)); + + /* Get CFGR1 register value */ + tmpcfgr1 = SYSCFG->CFGR1; + + /* Clear MEM_MODE bits */ + tmpcfgr1 &= (uint32_t) (~SYSCFG_CFGR1_MEM_MODE); + + /* Set the new MEM_MODE bits value */ + tmpcfgr1 |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_MemoryRemap; + + /* Set CFGR1 register with the new memory remap configuration */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 = tmpcfgr1; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the DMA channels remapping. + * @param SYSCFG_DMARemap: selects the DMA channels remap. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17: Remap TIM17 DMA requests from DMA1 channel1 to channel2 + * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM16: Remap TIM16 DMA requests from DMA1 channel3 to channel4 + * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM6DAC1: Remap TIM6/DAC1 DMA requests from DMA2 channel 3 to DMA1 channel 3 + * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM7DAC2: Remap TIM7/DAC2 DMA requests from DMA2 channel 4 to DMA1 channel 4 + * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_ADC2ADC4: Remap ADC2 and ADC4 DMA requests from DMA2 channel1/channel3 to channel3/channel4 + * @param NewState: new state of the DMA channel remapping. + * This parameter can be: Enable or Disable. + * @note When enabled, DMA channel of the selected peripheral is remapped + * @note When disabled, Default DMA channel is mapped to the selected peripheral + * @note + * By default TIM17 DMA requests is mapped to channel 1 + * use SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17, Enable) + * to remap TIM17 DMA requests to DMA1 channel 2 + * use SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17, Disable) + * to map TIM17 DMA requests to DMA1 channel 1 (default mapping) + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_DMARemap, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_DMA_REMAP(SYSCFG_DMARemap)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Remap the DMA channel */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= (uint32_t)SYSCFG_DMARemap; + } + else + { + /* use the default DMA channel mapping */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= (uint32_t)(~SYSCFG_DMARemap); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the remapping capabilities of DAC/TIM triggers. + * @param SYSCFG_TriggerRemap: selects the trigger to be remapped. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_DACTIM3: Remap DAC trigger from TIM8 to TIM3 + * @arg SYSCFG_TriggerRemap_TIM1TIM17: Remap TIM1 ITR3 from TIM4 TRGO to TIM17 OC + * @param NewState: new state of the trigger mapping. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @note ENABLE: Enable fast mode plus driving capability for selected pin + * @note DISABLE: Disable fast mode plus driving capability for selected pin + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_TriggerRemapConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_TriggerRemap, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_TRIGGER_REMAP(SYSCFG_TriggerRemap)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Remap the trigger */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= (uint32_t)SYSCFG_TriggerRemap; + } + else + { + /* Use the default trigger mapping */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= (uint32_t)(~SYSCFG_TriggerRemap); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the remapping capabilities of encoder mode. + * @ note This feature implement the so-called M/T method for measuring speed + * and position using quadrature encoders. + * @param SYSCFG_EncoderRemap: selects the remap option for encoder mode. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_No: No remap + * @arg SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM2: Timer 2 IC1 and IC2 connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2 + * @arg SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM3: Timer 3 IC1 and IC2 connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2 + * @arg SYSCFG_EncoderRemap_TIM4: Timer 4 IC1 and IC2 connected to TIM15 IC1 and IC2 + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_EncoderRemapConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_EncoderRemap) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_ENCODER_REMAP(SYSCFG_EncoderRemap)); + + /* Reset the encoder mode remapping bits */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= (uint32_t)(~SYSCFG_CFGR1_ENCODER_MODE); + + /* Set the selected configuration */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= (uint32_t)(SYSCFG_EncoderRemap); +} + +/** + * @brief Remaps the USB interrupt lines. + * @param NewState: new state of the mapping of USB interrupt lines. + * This parameter can be: + * @param ENABLE: Remap the USB interrupt line as following: + * @arg USB Device High Priority (USB_HP) interrupt mapped to line 74. + * @arg USB Device Low Priority (USB_LP) interrupt mapped to line 75. + * @arg USB Wakeup Interrupt (USB_WKUP) interrupt mapped to line 76. + * @param DISABLE: Use the default USB interrupt line: + * @arg USB Device High Priority (USB_HP) interrupt mapped to line 19. + * @arg USB Device Low Priority (USB_LP) interrupt mapped to line 20. + * @arg USB Wakeup Interrupt (USB_WKUP) interrupt mapped to line 42. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_USBInterruptLineRemapCmd(FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + /* Remap the USB interupt lines */ + *(__IO uint32_t *) CFGR1_USBITRMP_BB = (uint32_t)NewState; +} + +/** + * @brief Configures the I2C fast mode plus driving capability. + * @param SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus: selects the pin. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB6: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB6 + * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB7: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB7 + * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB8: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB8 + * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB9: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB9 + * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for I2C1 pins + * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C2: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for I2C2 pins + * @param NewState: new state of the DMA channel remapping. + * This parameter can be: + * @arg ENABLE: Enable fast mode plus driving capability for selected I2C pin + * @arg DISABLE: Disable fast mode plus driving capability for selected I2C pin + * @note For I2C1, fast mode plus driving capability can be enabled on all selected + * I2C1 pins using SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 parameter or independently + * on each one of the following pins PB6, PB7, PB8 and PB9. + * @note For remaing I2C1 pins (PA14, PA15...) fast mode plus driving capability + * can be enabled only by using SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 parameter. + * @note For all I2C2 pins fast mode plus driving capability can be enabled + * only by using SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C2 parameter. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlusConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_I2C_FMP(SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus)); + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable fast mode plus driving capability for selected I2C pin */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= (uint32_t)SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus; + } + else + { + /* Disable fast mode plus driving capability for selected I2C pin */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= (uint32_t)(~SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Enables or disables the selected SYSCFG interrupts. + * @param SYSCFG_IT: specifies the SYSCFG interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_IT_IXC: Inexact Interrupt + * @arg SYSCFG_IT_IDC: Input denormal Interrupt + * @arg SYSCFG_IT_OFC: Overflow Interrupt + * @arg SYSCFG_IT_UFC: Underflow Interrupt + * @arg SYSCFG_IT_DZC: Divide-by-zero Interrupt + * @arg SYSCFG_IT_IOC: Invalid operation Interrupt + * @param NewState: new state of the specified SYSCFG interrupts. + * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_ITConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_IT, FunctionalState NewState) +{ + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState)); + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_IT(SYSCFG_IT)); + + if (NewState != DISABLE) + { + /* Enable the selected SYSCFG interrupts */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= SYSCFG_IT; + } + else + { + /* Disable the selected SYSCFG interrupts */ + SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= ((uint32_t)~SYSCFG_IT); + } +} + +/** + * @brief Selects the GPIO pin used as EXTI Line. + * @param EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx : selects the GPIO port to be used as source + * for EXTI lines where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F). + * @param EXTI_PinSourcex: specifies the EXTI line to be configured. + * This parameter can be EXTI_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15) + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(uint8_t EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx, uint8_t EXTI_PinSourcex) +{ + uint32_t tmp = 0x00; + + /* Check the parameters */ + assert_param(IS_EXTI_PORT_SOURCE(EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx)); + assert_param(IS_EXTI_PIN_SOURCE(EXTI_PinSourcex)); + + tmp = ((uint32_t)0x0F) << (0x04 * (EXTI_PinSourcex & (uint8_t)0x03)); + SYSCFG->EXTICR[EXTI_PinSourcex >> 0x02] &= ~tmp; + SYSCFG->EXTICR[EXTI_PinSourcex >> 0x02] |= (((uint32_t)EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx) << (0x04 * (EXTI_PinSourcex & (uint8_t)0x03))); +} + +/** + * @brief Connects the selected parameter to the break input of TIM1. + * @note The selected configuration is locked and can be unlocked by system reset + * @param SYSCFG_Break: selects the configuration to be connected to break + * input of TIM1 + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_Break_PVD: PVD interrupt is connected to the break input of TIM1. + * @arg SYSCFG_Break_SRAMParity: SRAM Parity error is connected to the break input of TIM1. + * @arg SYSCFG_Break_HardFault: Lockup output of CortexM4 is connected to the break input of TIM1. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_BreakConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_Break) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_LOCK_CONFIG(SYSCFG_Break)); + + SYSCFG->CFGR2 |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_Break; +} + +/** + * @brief Disables the parity check on RAM. + * @note Disabling the parity check on RAM locks the configuration bit. + * To re-enable the parity check on RAM perform a system reset. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_BypassParityCheckDisable(void) +{ + /* Disable the adddress parity check on RAM */ + *(__IO uint32_t *) CFGR1_BYPADDRPAR_BB = (uint32_t)0x00000001; +} + +/** + * @brief Enables the ICODE SRAM write protection. + * @note Enabling the ICODE SRAM write protection locks the configuration bit. + * To disable the ICODE SRAM write protection perform a system reset. + * @param None + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_SRAMWRPEnable(uint32_t SYSCFG_SRAMWRP) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_PAGE(SYSCFG_SRAMWRP)); + + /* Enable the write-protection on the selected ICODE SRAM page */ + SYSCFG->RCR |= (uint32_t)SYSCFG_SRAMWRP; +} + +/** + * @brief Checks whether the specified SYSCFG flag is set or not. + * @param SYSCFG_Flag: specifies the SYSCFG flag to check. + * This parameter can be one of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_FLAG_PE: SRAM parity error flag. + * @retval The new state of SYSCFG_Flag (SET or RESET). + */ +FlagStatus SYSCFG_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t SYSCFG_Flag) +{ + FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET; + + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_FLAG(SYSCFG_Flag)); + + /* Check the status of the specified SPI flag */ + if ((SYSCFG->CFGR2 & SYSCFG_CFGR2_SRAM_PE) != (uint32_t)RESET) + { + /* SYSCFG_Flag is set */ + bitstatus = SET; + } + else + { + /* SYSCFG_Flag is reset */ + bitstatus = RESET; + } + /* Return the SYSCFG_Flag status */ + return bitstatus; +} + +/** + * @brief Clears the selected SYSCFG flag. + * @param SYSCFG_Flag: selects the flag to be cleared. + * This parameter can be any combination of the following values: + * @arg SYSCFG_FLAG_PE: SRAM parity error flag. + * @retval None + */ +void SYSCFG_ClearFlag(uint32_t SYSCFG_Flag) +{ + /* Check the parameter */ + assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_FLAG(SYSCFG_Flag)); + + SYSCFG->CFGR2 |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_Flag; +} + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ + +/** + * @} + */ +/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/ + |